JP7354546B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2018-049485A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform display control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides: arrangement means for arranging object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space; viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space; Generated data generated by a data generating means, comprising: a drawing setting means that projects the object data onto a projection plane that is set based on a viewpoint, and generates generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. generated data storage means for storing;
a display control means for causing a display means to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generation means includes:
separate storage execution means for storing predetermined generated data generated based on projecting the predetermined object data in separate storage means;
A mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of the application target data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space;
By applying the predetermined generated data as texture data to the application target data, an image corresponding to the predetermined generated data is displayed in a predetermined image area corresponding to the application target data of the image displayed on the display means. predetermined application means for making the
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, display control can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for jackpot occurrence lottery and the like. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a destination specifying process executed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a production side reservation area. It is a flowchart which shows the reception process of the hold|suspension command performed by the audio-optical side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the display duration period of a gaming session, which is executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by audio-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU. 6(a) to 7(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed in VDP. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created as drawing processing is executed. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of suggestion effects. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining the data composition of sound-light side ROM, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the storage area of sound-light side RAM. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the first special reach performance and the first alternative reach performance, and (c), (d) are the second special reach performance and the second alternative reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the suggestive effect, the special ready-to-reach effect, and the alternative ready-to-reach effect are executed. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation determination process performed by sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects performed by sound-light side MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of operation effects. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how operation effects are executed. (a) It is a flowchart showing the operation performance determination process executed by the sound-light side MPU, and (b) To explain the winning probability of each of the first operation performance and the second operation performance in the operation performance lottery process. FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of multi-screen production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process of the multiple screen effect performed by display CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing separate storage processing executed in VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the multi-screen effect performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process of the multi-screen effect performed by VDP. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the special symbol production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a memory module. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the color map data set corresponding to the "3" pattern, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the partial mask data set corresponding to the "3" pattern. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shadow mask data set corresponding to the "3" symbol; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shadow mask data set corresponding to the "3" symbol. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data. (a) It is a flowchart showing the special symbol performance selection process executed by the sound-light side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart for explaining the selection probabilities of the first to fifth display modes in the special symbol performance type lottery process. It is an explanatory diagram. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart showing the drawing data creation process of the special symbol effect executed in the VDP. 3 is a flowchart showing a first creation process executed by VDP. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the processing contents of the first creation process. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of edge processing effects. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for special character effects performed by display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing drawing data creation processing for a special character effect executed in the VDP. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining information set in each polygon of object data for a special character. 12 is a flowchart illustrating drawing data creation processing for a special character performance executed in a VDP in another embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining information on each pixel in drawing data in which color information is set.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball firing mechanism performs a game ball firing operation when a firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is manually operated.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning of the electric role open state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common symbol display section 38a is ended, the electric role open state is entered. In the electric utility open state, the general electric utility object 34a is in an open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a changing display of symbols is performed when a jackpot lottery is held triggered by a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34. Then, as a stop result after the fluctuating display of the symbols is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning to the first operating port 33 or a winning to the second operating port 34, the variable display of the symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol. be exposed. That is, when a variable display of symbols is performed on the special symbol display section 37a, a variable display of symbols is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. For example, in a game round in which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the symbol display device 41.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4(a) and FIG. 4(b) are diagrams showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is a figure showing P. In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, there are a first display mode and a second display mode as display modes when the display effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. The pattern shown in FIG. 3(j) is a pattern to be displayed in the first display mode. When the performance for the game round is started, a lottery for changing the display mode is executed by the sound emission control device 60, which will be described later, and by winning the lottery for changing the display mode, the first display mode and the second display mode are selected. Among the display modes, the current display mode for settings is changed to the current display mode for non-settings.

As shown in Figures 3(a) to 3(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers from "1" to "9" attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It looks like this. Further, five effective lines are set on the display surface P, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the variable display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a low-probability jackpot result or a high-probability jackpot result, which will be described later.

In addition, in the second display mode, a left symbol row, a middle symbol row, and a right symbol row are set, and in each symbol row, the main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed vertically in a periodic manner. The display will be switched. Then, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of three symbols (1×3) are stopped and displayed. The fluctuating display stops in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, and the fluctuating display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stops when a combination of symbols with the same number on a straight line is formed. When the game ends, a jackpot video is displayed as a low-probability jackpot result or a high-probability jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) The main pattern corresponds to a "non-specific pattern." When a highly certain jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, when a low-probability jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols. In addition, based on winning to either of the operating ports 33, 34, a variable display is started on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if you win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or winning the second operating port 34, you can win the prize in the special electric winning device 32. Shifts to opening/closing execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 configured as described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window 42 formed therein so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 43 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42 . Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 45 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 47. The upper tray 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a.

In the upper bulging portion 46, in an area outside the upper tray 46a, a first performance operating device 48 having an operating section manually operated by a player is provided. Further, in the lower bulging portion 47, in an area outside the lower plate 47a, a second performance operating device 49 is provided which includes an operating section that is manually operated by the player. The operation section of the first performance operation device 48 and the operation section of the second performance operation device 49 are each manually operated by the player in order to set the performance content on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 to a predetermined performance content. be done. In this case, the game round in which the performance corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed has a better jackpot result than the game round in which the performance corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed. The expectation level for the occurrence of will be high. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed more in the game round in which the performance corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed. It may also be configured such that the expectation level for the occurrence of a highly certain jackpot result is higher than in the game round.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a dispensing mechanism including a dispensing device, a dispensing control device, and a power source/firing control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In addition, in the main control device 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 etc. may be provided with a trace means for leaving traces of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving traces of its opening. You can also do this. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint (crimped part) that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the structure of a joint (crimped part) that requires the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that remains and leaves a trace of having been removed is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

The main control board 51 is equipped with an MPU 52 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A certain RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

Note that as the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 53 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 53, and RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply/launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source/launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

Note that a power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored by the power outage monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power outage is confirmed, a power outage signal is sent to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes processing in case of a power outage. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection is provided one-to-one for the winning ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering section. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and also determines the reach occurrence lottery for each game round and the display duration of the game round. Run the lottery.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 52 will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 52 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display on the special symbol display section 37a, setting of symbol display on the symbol display device 41, setting of display on the regular symbol display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, there is a winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type such as a high probability jackpot result or a low probability jackpot result. , a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates; a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display duration of the game round in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41; A random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is to be placed in an electric role open state. Note that each of these counters C1 to C3, CS, CINI, and C4 is provided in the lottery counter area 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CS, CINI, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored as an acquired information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. is stored in the pending storage area 54b.

The reservation storage area 54b includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored as special figure side reservation information in any of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. . Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment is made as to whether the execution is correct or not.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a win/fail table. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for low probability mode and a pass/fail table for high probability mode are set. In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as the jackpot lottery mode (hereinafter also referred to as win/fail lottery mode).

Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming condition in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that result in a win is arbitrary, as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are based on two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in which a jackpot occurs after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends. By providing differences, multiple jackpot results are set.

In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the round game is played 15 times regardless of the jackpot result. In each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once. Furthermore, each round game ends when 30 seconds, which is the opening duration period, has elapsed since the special electric winning device 32 became open, or when the number of prizes entered into the special electric winning device 32 reaches 10 or more. When the round game ends, the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. Incidentally, in this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is set so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. is drive-controlled, so by continuing to launch the game ball with the aim of winning a prize at the special electric winning device 32 in each round game, the ball can be sent to the special electric winning device 32 before the opening duration period of the special electric winning device 32 elapses. When the number of winnings becomes 10 or more, the condition for ending the round game is satisfied.

As for the support mode of the general utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the gaming area PA, the normal function of the second operating port 34 is A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric utility object 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric utility role opening lottery using the electric utility role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5 ), however, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility object 34a becomes open when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one more time. The opening time is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the power utility open state is won and the power utility object 34a is opened multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the electric utility role per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, a lottery for opening electric utility objects. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in . In addition, the secured time that is secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held (for example, in the general map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. You can leave it there. Furthermore, increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery (i.e. , shortening the one-time variable display time on the common map display section 38a), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions may be applied. This may increase the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. As such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result and a high-probability jackpot result are set. The low probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games played after the shift reaches the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times). The high certainty jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state winning, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly. Note that in relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state is a state in which the jackpot lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. In the distribution table, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "15 to 29" correspond to high probability jackpot results. There is.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that can display symbols in a variable manner, and in a game round that results in a jackpot, the stop display result after the variable display becomes a special display result. This is a display state that is made to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to lead to the special display result after the start of the variable display of symbols and before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

Two types of expected performance are set: the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance and a preview performance for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach performance or a special display result at a stage before the relevant ready-to-reach performance occurs.

In the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result is established by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. This includes a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to create a ready-to-reach effect. , includes those in which a combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-reach effect.

Specifically, regarding the reach effect, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of ready-to-reach symbols that are likely to form a combination, and symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stopped symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

To specifically explain the display contents in FIG. 4, first, the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same number on lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. By being caught, it becomes a reach performance. In the case of a jackpot result, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are changed. Display ends.

The preview performance is performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are those in which the background image is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice effect can occur in any game round when a reach effect is performed or when a reach effect is not performed, but it is higher when a reach effect is performed than when a reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round that results in a jackpot. In addition, in a game round that does not result in a jackpot, the game is executed when the ready-to-reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect by referring to the ready-to-reach table stored in the ROM 53. On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform a preview effect is made not in the main control device 50 but in the sound emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured such that it is incremented by "1" sequentially within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 52 to determine the display continuation period of the game round on the special symbol display section 37a and the display continuation period of the game round on the symbol display device 41.

For example, the general utility goods release counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general utility goods opening counter C4 is updated regularly, and is stored in the general electric power holding area 54c at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 5, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a dispensing control device 55 and a power source/discharge control device 57. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering section. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls using the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power source/launch control device 57 based on the fact that the launch operating device 28 is being operated. The power supply/launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

A special figure display section 37a and a regular figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and display control of these special figure display section 37a and ordinary figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU52. That is, in each game round, the MPU 52 executes display control of the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric utility object 34a, the MPU 52 executes display control of the ordinary electric figure display section 38a.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 52 are a special electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the opening/closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. Moreover, when the electric role opening state of the electric utility object 34a is won, the driving control of the electric utility object drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Further, an audio emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 52 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the MPU 52 are set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, it is determined whether the power outage flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". Determine whether In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54, such as initializing a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is sent to the voice light emission control device 60 in order to make the current gaming state recognized. do.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds). First, in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed.

In the following step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to "1".

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output to various drive units in accordance with the output information. For example, if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state is set, the corresponding Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started, and the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a to the closed state is set. is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, reading processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor are read, and the presence or absence of a winning in the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35 is determined. Execute processing to identify.

In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

In the following step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed. In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds, which is the predetermined firing cycle, as already explained.

In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, the disconnection of each winning detection sensor and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are checked based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode. The contents of the special figure special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S214, general electric power control processing is executed. In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process is executed to obtain the reservation information on the general electrician side, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. Then, a release determination is made regarding the pending information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, a process for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. At the same time, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

In the subsequent step S216, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Further, in step S217, a payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as an output target. In the following step S218, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the MPU 52 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 9.

In the special figure special electric train control process, first, a reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S301). FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the reservation information acquisition process. When the special figure detection sensor of the first actuation port 33 or the special figure detection sensor of the second actuation port 34 is ON (step S401: YES), the side of the special figure stored in the hold area RE It is determined whether the number of pending information has reached the upper limit number (specifically, 4 pieces) (step S402).

When a negative determination is made in step S402, acquisition processing of special figure side reservation information is executed (step S403). In the acquisition process, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set to any special figure among the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in the reservation area RE. It is stored in the uppermost area where side hold information is also not stored.

Thereafter, destination identification processing is executed (step S404). In the future specifying process, it is specified whether the special symbol side reservation information acquired this time corresponds to either the information that results in a jackpot or the information that corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach effect. In other words, the identification of these various pieces of information will be executed when the special drawing side reservation information becomes the target for the start of a game round, but prior to that, the identification of these various pieces of information will be carried out at the stage where the special drawing side reservation information is acquired. is performed in the first identification process. In addition, even if the destination identification process is executed, if the player becomes the target for the start of a game round, the information already specified in the destination identification process will not be used as is, but the various information mentioned above will be specified again. . However, even if the various information mentioned above is specified again at the start of the game round, the same information as the special drawing side reservation information that is referenced at the start of the game round is referred to in the earlier identification process. The information specified at the start of a game round corresponds to the information specified in the previous identification process.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the destination identification process. In the destination specifying process, first, a win/fail table corresponding to the win/fail lottery mode in the case where the currently acquired special symbol side pending information is the start target of a game round is read from the ROM 53 (step S501).

Since the MPU 52 stores the result of the destination identification process in the RAM 54, the special figure side pending information that is the start target of the game round corresponds to the jackpot result earlier than the currently acquired special figure side pending information in the holding area RE. If it corresponds to a jackpot result, it is possible to specify whether the type of jackpot result corresponds to a high probability jackpot result or a low probability jackpot result. can. In step S501, special figure side pending information corresponding to the jackpot result exists in the special figure side pending information that is subject to the start of the game round before the currently acquired special figure side pending information in the holding area RE. If the special drawing side reservation information corresponds to a high probability jackpot result, read the win/fail table for the high probability mode, and if the special drawing side reservation information corresponds to a low probability jackpot result. If so, read out the validity table for low probability mode. In the holding area RE, there are multiple pieces of special drawing side holding information that correspond to jackpot results among the special drawing side holding information that is subject to the start of the game before the special drawing side holding information acquired this time. If so, read out the win/fail table corresponding to the type of jackpot result of the special figure side pending information in which the starting order of the game round is the later order. In addition, in the reservation area RE, special figure side reservation information that corresponds to the jackpot result exists in the special figure side reservation information that is subject to the start of the game round before the special figure side reservation information acquired this time. If there is no winning/failure lottery mode, the winning/failure table corresponding to the current winning/failure lottery mode is read out.

Thereafter, the validity determination process is executed with reference to the validity table read in step S501 (step S502). In the hit/fail determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 in the special drawing side pending information acquired this time corresponds to the random number value that results in a jackpot in the win/fail table read in step S501. . If it is determined in the validity determination process that it corresponds to the jackpot result (step S503: YES), jackpot information is set in the RAM 54 (step S504).

When a negative determination is made in step S503, reach determination processing is executed (step S504). In the reach determination process, the reach table is read from the ROM 53, and it is checked whether the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 in the special figure side pending information acquired this time corresponds to the reach corresponding value stored in the reach table. Determine. If it is determined in the reach determination process that the occurrence of a reach effect is supported (step S506: YES), a process for specifying the display duration of the game round is executed (step S507). Further, even when the currently acquired special figure side reservation information corresponds to the jackpot result, after executing the process of step S504 described above, the process of specifying the display continuation period of the game round is executed (step S507).

In the process of specifying the display duration of the game, if the special figure side pending information acquired this time corresponds to the jackpot result, the display duration table at the time of the jackpot occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the currently acquired special figure side pending information is read from the ROM 53. If the information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53. Then, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS in the special drawing side reservation information acquired this time is the value determined as the first period which is the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the first special reach effect in the display continuation period table. Or, it is determined whether the value corresponds to a value defined as the second period which is the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the second special ready-to-reach effect in the display continuation period table. These first special reach performance and second special reach performance are each a type of reach performance.

When the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the special figure side reservation information acquired this time corresponds to the first period (step S508: YES), the first period information is set in the RAM 54 (step S509). The first period information is information indicating that the display continuation period of the game time will be the first period when the currently acquired special figure side reservation information becomes the start target of the game time. Further, when the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the special figure side reservation information acquired this time corresponds to the second period (step S510: YES), the second period information is set in the RAM 54 (step S511). The second period information is information indicating that the display continuation period of the game time will be the second period when the currently acquired special figure side reservation information becomes the start target of the game time.

Returning to the description of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 10), after executing the destination specifying process in step S404, a process of transmitting a hold command corresponding to the result of the destination specifying process is executed (step S405). In the holding command transmission process, the information corresponding to the content specified in the destination identification process in step S404 and the special map side holding information acquired this time are selected from any of the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE. A pending command including information indicating whether the command is stored in the ROM 53 is read out from the ROM 53 and transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

As information corresponding to the content specified in the destination specifying process, for example, when the process of step S504 is executed in the destination specifying process of step S404, jackpot information is included in the pending command. Further, when the process of step S509 is executed in the destination identification process of step S404, the first period information is included in the pending command. Further, when the process of step S511 is executed in the destination specifying process of step S404, the second period information is included in the pending command. Note that if none of steps S504, S509, and S511 are executed in the destination specifying process of step S404, information corresponding to the processing result of the destination specifying process is not set in the pending command.

Here, the processing contents of the MPU 62 provided in the audio emission control board 61 of the audio emission control device 60 when a hold command is received will be explained. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a ROM 63 for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. It includes a RAM 64 as a memory, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

First, the production side holding area 65 provided in the RAM 64 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, the production side holding area 65 is set with a first unit area 65a, a second unit area 65b, a third unit area 65c, and a fourth unit area 65d. These first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d correspond one-to-one with the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE provided in the RAM 54 of the main controller 50. In other words, the n-th unit areas 65a to 65d and the n-th reservation areas RE1 to RE4 correspond to each other, and the n-th unit areas 65a to 65d contain the special map side reservation information stored in the n-th reservation areas RE1 to RE4. Information on the processing result of the previous identification processing for is stored.

Each of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d has a validity area, a first period information presence/absence area, and a second period information presence/absence area. In the win/fail area, information indicating whether or not the jackpot information is the special drawing side pending information set in the destination specifying process (FIG. 11) in the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 is stored. In the first period information presence/absence area, information indicating whether or not the first period information is special drawing side pending information set in the destination specifying process (FIG. 11) in the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 is stored. . In the second period information presence/absence area, information indicating whether or not the second period information is special drawing side pending information set in the destination specifying process (FIG. 11) in the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 is stored. .

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the suspension command reception process executed by the MPU 62 of the audio emission control device 60. Note that the pending command reception process is activated when a pending command is received.

First, a process of identifying the area to be written is executed (step S601). As already explained, the hold command includes storage destination information indicating in which of the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE the special drawing side hold information that triggered its transmission was stored. is set. In the writing target area grasping process, the area corresponding to the storage destination information set in the currently received hold command is grasped among the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d of the production side holding area 65. When the storage destination information corresponds to the n-th reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE, the n-th unit areas 65a to 65d are determined in the writing target area determination process.

If jackpot information is set in the hold command received this time (step S602: YES), jackpot information is set in the success/fail areas of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d grasped in step S601 (step S603). . Note that when a negative determination is made in step S602, the validity areas of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d determined in step S601 are cleared to "0".

If the first period information is set in the hold command received this time (step S604: YES), the first period information presence/absence area of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d grasped in step S601 is set to the first period information. Period information is set (step S605). Note that when a negative determination is made in step S604, the presence/absence area of first period information of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d grasped in step S601 is cleared to "0".

If the second period information is set in the hold command received this time (step S606: YES), the second period information is set in the second period information presence/absence area of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d grasped in step S601. Period information is set (step S607). Note that when a negative determination is made in step S606, the presence/absence areas of the second period information of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d grasped in step S601 are cleared to "0".

Although not shown, the information in the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d of the performance-side holding area 65 is shifted when the game repeat performance is started. Specifically, when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 52, second unit area 65b→first unit area 65a, third unit area 65c→second unit area 65b and fourth unit area 65d→ After the information is shifted in the order of the third unit area 65c, the fourth unit area 65d is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to maintain the correspondence between the holding area RE and the performance-side holding area 65 even when a game round is started.

In the pending command receiving process, after the processes of steps S601 to S607 are executed, the pending command transmitting process is executed (step S608). In the pending command transmission process, the pending command is transmitted to the display control device 70. On the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, when a game replay is being performed, a number of pieces of special symbol-side reservation information that are reserved in the reservation area RE of the main control device 50 are reserved. The unit image GR is displayed (see FIG. 4(b) and FIG. 23). Specifically, the reservation unit image GR is displayed in the lower area of the display surface P, and when a plurality of pieces of special figure side reservation information are reserved and stored in the reservation area RE, the lower region of the display surface P is displayed. A plurality of reserved unit images GR are displayed side by side. When the display control device 70 receives a hold command from the sound emission control device 60, the display control device 70 increases the number of pending unit images GR by one, and receives a command from the sound emission control device 60 indicating that a game round is newly started. When received, the number of pending unit images GR is decreased by one.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 9), after executing the reservation information acquisition process in step S301, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the RAM 54 of the main controller 50 is read (step S302). ), the special figure special electric train address table stored in the ROM 53 of the main controller 50 is read out (step S303). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S304).

The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the game repeat performance and a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the game recurrent effect, there is a special figure fluctuation start process (step S306) which is a process for starting the game recurrent effect, and a process for advancing the game recurrent effect. A certain special figure fluctuation process (step S307) and a special figure confirmed process (step S308), which is a process for ending the game repeat performance, are set. In addition, as a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric line start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32. The special electric line opening process (step S310), the special electric line closed process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, the ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special call end process (step S312) is set, which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state. In such a processing configuration, the special figure/telephone counter is a counter for the MPU 52 to grasp which of the above plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the special figure/telephone address table includes a special figure/telephone counter. The start address of a program for executing the plurality of types of processing described above is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special electric counter.

After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed (step S305). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the start address of SA0 is obtained and the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S306, and the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "1". If so, the start address of SA1 is acquired and the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation processing in step S307, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the start address of SA2 is acquired and the process jumps to step S308. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "3", the start address of SA3 is obtained and the process jumps to the special electric line start process of step S309, and the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "3". If it is "4", the start address of SA4 is acquired and the process jumps to the special train release process in step S310, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "5", the start address of SA5 is acquired. The process jumps to the special train closing process in step S311, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "6", the start address of SA6 is acquired and the process jumps to the special train ending process in step S312. When any of the processes from step S306 to step S312 is executed, this special figure special electric control process is ended. The processing from step S306 to step S312 will be individually explained below.

First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 14.

When the special figure side reservation information is stored in the reservation area RE (step S701: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S702). In the data setting process, the special figure side reservation information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. In the data setting process, a process is then executed to shift the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE to the upper side. Specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: second holding area RE2 → first holding area RE1, third holding area RE3 → second holding area RE2, fourth holding area RE4 → third holding area RE3. After that, the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". In addition, when the said data setting process is executed, the data setting is performed so that the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is changed to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the number of reservations by one.

After executing the data setting process, a validity determination process is executed (step S703). In the win/fail determination process, it is first determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability mode success/failure table provided in the ROM 53 is referred to, and the information for the success/failure judgment among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value obtained from the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether the information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In addition, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is determined by referring to the win/fail table for the low probability mode provided in the ROM 53. Determine whether it matches the numerical information.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S704: YES), a type determination process is executed (step S705). In the type determination process, the distribution table is read from the ROM 53. Then, the type of jackpot result is grasped by comparing the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the read distribution table.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S706). Specifically, information on the display mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 53, and the specified information is is stored in the RAM 54. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of display modes that are stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a are set differently for each type of jackpot result, and in step S706, the types of display modes that are stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a are set to be different for each type of jackpot result. Information on the display mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 54. Note that the information on the display mode in which the game is stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the display mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of display modes may be set for each jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the result of the type determination processing is executed (step S707). Specifically, the RAM 54 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the flag corresponding to the result of the type determination process in step S705 is set to " 1”.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the win/fail determination process that it is not a jackpot win (step S704: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S708). Specifically, the information on the display mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for losing results stored in advance in the ROM 53, and the specified information is is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the display mode selected in this case is different from the information on the display mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, a process of specifying the display duration of the game session is executed (step S709). FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the display duration of a game session. If a jackpot result is specified in the success/failure determination process of the current game round (step S801: YES), a display continuation period table at the time of occurrence of a jackpot is read from the ROM 53 (step S802). In the display continuation period table at the time of occurrence of the jackpot, information on the display continuation period of the gaming session is set in correspondence with a plurality of numerical ranges of the fluctuation type counter CS. Furthermore, since a reach effect occurs in a game round that results in a jackpot, only the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of a reach effect is set in the display duration table when a jackpot occurs. In addition, the display duration period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect includes a first period corresponding to a first special reach effect or a first alternative reach effect, which will be described later, and a second special reach effect or a first alternative reach effect, which will be described later. A second period corresponding to two alternative reach performances is included.

If the current game round does not correspond to the occurrence of a jackpot result (step S801: NO), the reach table is read from the ROM 53, and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is By comparing with the ready-to-reach table, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of a ready-to-reach effect (step S803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S803, a display continuation period table at the time of occurrence of a reach is read from the ROM 53 (step S804). In the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence, information on the display continuation period of game times is set in correspondence with a plurality of numerical ranges of the variable type counter CS. All of the information regarding the set display duration of the game round corresponds to the display duration corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect. In addition, the display duration period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect includes a first period corresponding to a first special reach effect or a first alternative reach effect, which will be described later, and a second special reach effect or a first alternative reach effect, which will be described later. A second period corresponding to two alternative reach performances is included.

When a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined whether the number of pieces of special symbol side reservation information held and stored in the reservation area RE is equal to or greater than the reference number of short fluctuations (step S805). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of special figure side pending information that are being held and stored is 3 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S805, the display continuation period table at the time of disconnection is read from the ROM 53 (step S806). The display duration table at the time of failure includes table information that is referred to when the number of stored special figure side reservation information is 0, and table information that is referred to when the number of pieces of special figure side reservation information that is reserved and stored is 1. It includes table information that is referred to in the case of , and table information that is referred to when the number of pieces of reserved special figure side pending information is two. In each of these pieces of table information, information on the display continuation period of a gaming session is set in correspondence with a plurality of numerical value ranges of the variation type counter CS. In this case, the average duration of the display duration of the selected game times becomes longer in the order of 2 pieces of table information→1 piece of table information→0 pieces of table information.

When any one of the processes in step S802, step S804, and step S806 is executed, the numerical information acquired from the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is read out (step S807). Then, by comparing the numerical information acquired from the fluctuation type counter CS against the display duration table read out in step S802, step S804, or step S806, information on the display duration in the current game round is obtained. Read out (step S808).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, short-term information is read out as information on the display duration in the current game round (step S809). The short term is the shortest display duration that can be selected when referring to the display duration table when a jackpot occurs, the shortest display duration that can be selected when referring to the display duration table when reach occurs, and the shortest display duration that can be selected when referring to the display duration table when a reach occurs. This corresponds to a period shorter than any of the shortest display durations that can be selected when referring to the display duration table at the time. Specifically, it is set to 1.5 seconds. In this way, in a situation where three pieces of special figure side pending information are pending and stored, when a game round corresponding to a winning result in which no reach display occurs is started, the shortest display duration period is selected. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of digesting the special figure side pending information, and it becomes difficult to continue the situation where the maximum number of special figure side pending information is held and stored.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), after the process for specifying the display continuation period of the game round is executed in step S709, the information on the display continuation period read out in the specified process is stored in the RAM 54. set in the special figure special electric timer counter (step S710). The numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in the timer update process in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, as a game round production, a fluctuating display of symbols on the special symbol display section 37a and a fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when each of these fluctuating displays is ended, the game round is stopped. With the result displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is on standby on the active line), the final stop display is performed for a final stop period (0.5 seconds). In this case, the display duration period of the game session acquired in step S709 is the total period of one game session, and in step S710, the display duration period of the game session acquired in step S709 is changed to the final stop period. The information for the period after subtracting the minutes is set in the special figure special electric timer counter.

Thereafter, the variation command and type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60 (step S711). The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success/failure judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the type judgment process, and the continuation of the display of game times. Contains data corresponding to the period. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that it is a fluctuation command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine validity. and lottery result data corresponding to the result of the type determination process are set, and the remaining 8 bits of data set period data corresponding to the display continuation period of the game round. Therefore, when the MPU 62 of the audio emission control device 60 receives a variation command, it recognizes that it is a variation command from the identification data, and determines the result of the validity judgment process and the type judgment process from the lottery result data. The result is recognized, and the display continuation period of the current game round is recognized from the period data. Here, since the MPU 52 selects the display duration of different game times depending on whether or not a reach effect occurs, even if the variable command does not include information on whether or not a reach effect occurs, the sound emission In the control device 60, it is possible to specify whether or not a reach effect has occurred based on the information on the display duration of the game round. In this regard, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not a reach effect occurs. Note that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach effect occurs.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the validity judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the type judgment process, and whether it is high probability mode. It includes data indicating whether or not the mode is a high-frequency support mode, and data indicating whether the mode is a high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that the command is a type command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine whether the command is correct or not. Lottery result data corresponding to the result of type determination processing is set, and the remaining 8 bits of data are state recognition data indicating whether or not the mode is high probability mode and whether or not it is high frequency support mode. is set. Therefore, when the audio emission control device 60 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the validity determination process and the result of the type determination process from the lottery result data. , recognizes whether or not the mode is high probability mode and whether or not the mode is high frequency support mode from the state recognition data.

Here, both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the validity determination process and the result of the type determination process. Therefore, in the audio emission control device 60, by comparing the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command, the sound emission control device 60 eliminates noise and noise regarding reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to identify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, if both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variation command and type command is executed, and if both lottery result data do not match, can be notified. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound emission control device 60 may be configured to execute a game replay effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the relevant game round. Regardless of the result of the process, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a complete miss may be reliably stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the game repeat effect may be configured to be performed for a display duration corresponding to the period data included in the variable command, or may be configured to continue until the next variable command and type command are received. Good too. Note that the variation command may include a configuration in which data of one of the results of the validity determination process and the result of the type determination process is not included, or a configuration in which both data are not included.

When receiving the variation command and the type command, the audio emission control device 60 executes a process for starting the game repeat effect. When the game repeat performance is started, the symbol display device 41 starts moving and displaying symbols in all symbol rows. Then, when the game repeat effect ends, the moving display of the symbols in all the symbol rows is stopped, a standby display is performed, and finally a static display is performed. In this case, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the validity determination process and the type determination process is statically displayed.

After executing the process of step S711, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the symbols in a variable manner (step S712). Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S713). Since the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "1" when the process of step S713 is executed. .

Next, the special figure fluctuation processing in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

In the special figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the display continuation period of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode in the special figure display section 37a is set as a rule. Execute processing to change the This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. Moreover, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether there is a winning result or not and whether or not a reach effect occurs.

When it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is sent to the sound emission control device 60 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41, and the special symbol is displayed. The display mode in the section 37a is set to be a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, information on the final stop period (0.5 seconds) of the game round is read from the ROM 53 and set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the value corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation.

Next, the special figure confirmation process of step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the condition that the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. Specifically, first, information on the opening period (10 seconds) is read from the ROM 53, and the read information on the opening period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the RAM 54. Thereafter, an opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 60. The opening command is a command for making the audio light emission control device 60 recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, by incrementing the special figure special electric line counter by 1, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the current game round does not correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined whether or not both the high frequency flag and the upper limit correspondence flag provided in the RAM 54 are set to "1". The high frequency flag is a flag for the MPU 52 to specify that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the MPU 52 uses the high frequency flag in the general electricity control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. By determining whether the frequency flag is set to "1", it is determined whether control corresponding to the high frequency support mode should be executed. Further, the upper limit correspondence flag is a flag for the MPU 52 to specify whether or not the current high-frequency support mode should be terminated when 100 gaming times are completed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. When the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low probability jackpot result ends, the high frequency flag is set to "1" and the upper limit correspondence flag is set to "1". When both the high frequency flag and the upper limit correspondence flag are set to "1", the value of the high frequency continuation counter provided in the RAM 54 is subtracted by 1. The high frequency continuation counter is for the MPU 52 to specify whether or not the number of playing times after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a low-probability jackpot result has ended is the number of times that will trigger the end of the high frequency support mode. is the counter. If the value of the high frequency continuation counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0", both the high frequency flag and the upper limit correspondence flag are cleared to "0". Furthermore, if the current game round does not correspond to the jackpot result, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter changes from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

Next, the special train start process in step S309 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

If the opening period has elapsed, the round counter provided in the RAM 54 is set to the value of the number of round games (specifically, "15") corresponding to the current jackpot result. The round counter is a counter for the MPU 52 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a winning counter provided in the RAM 54 is set to "10". The winning counter is a counter used by the MPU 52 to determine whether or not a winning of the upper limit number of game balls has occurred in one round game. Further, information corresponding to the open duration period (30 seconds) of one round game is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the RAM 54. Then, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened. Thereafter, by incrementing the special figure special electric line counter by 1, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line start process to the value corresponding to the special electric line open process.

Next, the special train opening process of step S310 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

In the special line opening process, if the round game termination condition is satisfied, the special line winning device 32 is closed and the round counter is decremented by 1. Then, a closing period (2 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the special train special train counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special train opening process to the value corresponding to the special train closing process.

Next, the special train closed processing in step S311 in the special train special train control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

In the special electric train closing process, if the value of the round counter is not "0", it is determined whether the closing period has elapsed. If the closing period has passed, set the winning counter in the RAM 54 to "10" and set the information corresponding to the open duration period (30 seconds) of one round game in the special figure special electric timer counter of the RAM 54. do. Then, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened. Thereafter, by subtracting 1 from the special train special train counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special train closed process to the value corresponding to the special train open process. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is "0", an ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 60. The ending command is a command for making the audio emission control device 60 recognize that it is the timing to start the ending effect. Further, the information on the ending period (10 seconds) stored in advance in the ROM 53 is read out, and the information on the ending period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the RAM 54. Thereafter, by incrementing the special train special train counter by 1, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special train closing process to the value corresponding to the special train ending process.

Next, the special train end process of step S312 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 9) will be explained.

When the ending period has elapsed, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a high probability jackpot result, "1" is set in each of the high probability flag and the high frequency flag of the RAM 54. The high probability flag is a flag for the MPU 52 to specify that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the MPU 52 sets the high probability flag to "1" in the win/fail determination process when starting a game round. By determining whether or not it is, it is determined which of the high-probability mode validity table and the low-probability mode validity table should be referred to as the validity table. In addition, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low-probability jackpot result, the high frequency flag and upper limit correspondence flag in the RAM 54 are each set to "1", and the high frequency continuation counter is set to "100". Set. Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter changes from the value corresponding to the special electric line end process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Audio light emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5.

The sound emission control device 60 includes the sound emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted, as described above. As already explained, the MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. It has a built-in RAM 64, which is a memory for this purpose, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator.

Note that as the ROM 63, a storage means (ie, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 63 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 63, and RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, but a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 50, a first effect operation device 48, and a second effect operation device 49 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting section 44 and a speaker section 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display control device 70 is also connected thereto.

The processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side MPU 62) of the sound and light emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the audio-optical side MPU 62.

First, a table setting process is executed to set a control table used to control the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44, the sound output of the speaker unit 45, and the control of the display control device 70 (step S901). . In the control table, pointer information is set in a sequential manner, and in correspondence with each pointer information, data for controlling light emission of the display light emitting section 44 and sound output control of the speaker section 45 are set. A combination of data to be output to the display control device 70 and commands to be output to the display control device 70 in order to control the display control device 70 is set. In the table setting process, a control table for performing processing corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as main MPU 52) is set.

Thereafter, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 on the content of display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed (step S902). In the command selection process, commands are output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S901.

Thereafter, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed (step S903). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S901. Further, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker section 45 is executed (step S904). In the sound output control process, the sound output of the speaker section 45 is controlled according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S901. After that, pointer update processing is executed (step S905). In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information. As a result, the combination of various data to be referenced in the current control table is changed to a combination corresponding to the next control timing.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S901 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S1001: YES), various storage processes are executed (step S1002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information about the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game round is specified, The identified information is written to the RAM 64. Further, information on the display duration of the current game round is specified from the information included in the variation command, and the specified information is written into the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as the sound-light side RAM 64).

After that, a performance determination process is executed (step S1003). In the effect determination process, if the display duration of the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of a ready-to-win effect, a process for determining the type of the ready-to-win effect is executed. In addition, it also executes processing for determining whether or not to perform a preview performance and processing for determining the type of preview performance.

After that, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1004). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a low-probability jackpot result or a high-probability jackpot result, a combination of the same symbols is placed on one active line on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is selected for a high-probability jackpot result, while the same even-numbered symbol combination can be selected for both a low-probability jackpot result and a high-probability jackpot result. When the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a high-probability jackpot result, an effect indicating a high-probability jackpot result is executed in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode. In the first display mode in which a plurality of active lines are set, the active line on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed is randomly determined by lottery or the like. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the presence or absence of a reach effect is determined from the contents of the variation command. When a reach effect occurs, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line, and a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line, is sent to the current stop. Decide based on the resulting information. On the other hand, when a ready-to-win effect does not occur, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols and a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are not established on the active line is determined as information on the current stop result.

Thereafter, control table setting processing is executed (step S1005). In the control table setting process, a control table corresponding to the combination of the display duration of the current game round, the result of the production determination process (step S1003), and the result of the stop symbol determination process (step S1004) is stored in the ROM 63 (hereinafter referred to as , is read out from the audio/optical side ROM 63) and stored in the audio/optical side RAM 64.

In the table setting process, when an opening command is received from the main side MPU 52 (step S1006: YES), clearing process of the storage area 64a of suggested performance information provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is executed (step S1007). The storage area 64a for suggestion performance information is an area for storing information on whether or not to execute a suggestion performance, which will be described later. Furthermore, a control table setting process is executed (step S1008). In the control table setting process, a control table for controlling the execution of the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode and the subsequent effect during the opening/closing execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 63 and written into the sound/light side RAM 64. By controlling the performance with reference to the control table, the opening performance and subsequent performance during the opening/closing execution mode are executed in the display light emitting section 44 and the speaker section 45. Further, by appropriately outputting commands to the display control device 70 with reference to the control table, the opening performance and subsequent performance during the opening/closing execution mode are executed on the symbol display device 41.

In the table setting process, processes related to the first performance operation device 48 and the second performance operation device 49 are executed in steps S1009 to S1013. This process will be explained in detail later. Further, in the table setting process, after the processes in steps S1009 to S1013 are executed, other processes are executed (step S1014). Other processing includes a control table for controlling the execution of the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode, and the execution of the demonstration display effect in a situation where neither the game replay effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed. It is read from the sound-light side ROM63 and written into the sound-light side RAM64.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands sent from the audio emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. be done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to a work RAM 73 and a memory module 74 via a bus, and issues transfer instructions to transfer various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60. I do. The display CPU 72 is also connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and issues drawing instructions for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60. conduct. The memory module 74, work RAM 73, VRAM 75, and VDP 76 will be explained below.

The memory module 74 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 74 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing, read-only memory (ROM).

The various image data stored in the memory module 74 include object data such as characters displayed on the pattern display device 41, texture data pasted to the object data, and the backmost image in one frame of images. Contains image data for the back side that makes up the image.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, a polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is an image pasted to each polygon of object data, and by pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image including a pattern or a character, is generated. The texture data can be held in any way, but it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette that is referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back side can be stored in any manner, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the rear surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-shaped object data (that is, plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 73 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred to the work RAM 73 from the memory module 74 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 . Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAMs such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Note that although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes an expansion buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the pattern display device 41 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72 using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81, specifically by processing it. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 76 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a geometry calculation section 83, a rendering section 84, a register 85, and a display circuit 86. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 87 for the display CPU 72 and an I/F 88 for the VRAM 75.

The I/F 87 for the display CPU 72 causes the register 85 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 . The geometry calculation unit 83 reads various image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the drawing list stored in the register 85. Furthermore, the geometry calculation unit 83 places object data designated as a placement target within the world coordinate system. Furthermore, the geometry calculation unit 83 executes various coordinate transformation processes when and after placing the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is finally clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

The rendering unit 84 performs light source adjustment for each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 85. Furthermore, the rendering unit 84 creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane and setting color information using texture data, and further performs various adjustments based on depth information. One frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, is created in the frame buffer 82. One frame of drawing data refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in a configuration where the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

Note that all of the control programs for the operation of the geometry calculation section 83 and the rendering section 84 may be provided by a drawing list, and the VDP 76 may have a built-in memory in which the control programs are stored in advance, and the control programs and the drawing list may be provided. The configuration may be such that the geometry calculation section 83 and the rendering section 84 execute processing depending on the contents of the . Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance. Alternatively, the geometry calculation unit 83 and the rendering unit 84 may be configured to execute processing only by operating hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list, without using a program.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to have a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) for each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to a full-color system; for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b, in a situation where drawing data on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 86, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 86. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 86. The resolution of the transferred drawing data is adjusted by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 86 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

The processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 at a predetermined period, specifically, at a 20 millisecond period.

Note that when the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, and then outputs the image signal on a horizontal line that includes the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially outputted to the lined dots, and image signals are outputted sequentially from the top to the right dots for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is outputted to the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, thereby making the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of one frame of the image is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 milliseconds, which is the same as the update cycle of one frame's worth of images. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if no V-interrupt signal is received, if 20 milliseconds have passed since the previous V-interrupt process was activated, a new V-interrupt process is activated.

In the V-interrupt process, if this is the timing to start power supply to the display CPU 72 (step S1101: YES), all texture data previously stored in the memory module 74 is transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The data is read out to the texture area 81a (step S1102).

If a negative determination is made in step S1101 or if the process in step S1102 is executed, command analysis processing is executed (step S1103). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the audio/light MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt process regardless of what process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, a command received at the input port 77 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

Thereafter, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S1104: YES), command correspondence processing is executed (step S1105). In the command correspondence process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the pattern display device 41. be. Specifically, in the execution target table, the pointer information corresponding to each update timing of the image is set to be a serial number, and the pointer information corresponding to each update timing of the image is set to be a serial number. Information that defines the processing required to display the image is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1104 or if the process in step S1105 is executed, task processing is executed (step S1106). In task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table that is set as the target of use, it instructs the VDP 76 to draw in order to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing. Configure the various data necessary to perform the operations. Specifically, the various data include address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74 or VRAM 75, address information of an area to which image data to be controlled is transferred in VRAM 75, and image data to be controlled. There are information on frame regions 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created using the 3D image, and various information for creating a 3D image using a virtual three-dimensional space.

Thereafter, drawing list output processing is executed (step S1107). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of images corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately previous task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list.

After that, pointer update processing is executed (step S1108). In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to the pointer information of the next order. As a result, the information to be referred to in the current execution target table is changed to information corresponding to the next image update timing.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the task processing in step S1106.

In the task processing, first, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S1201). In the setting process for starting control, the display CPU 72 executes a process for setting an individual image for which control is to be newly started in the current processing cycle. Note that the individual image refers to one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, one 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data, and the like.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled to start in the current processing time. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations when controlling the individual image, and it corresponds one-to-one to the individual image recognized as the control start target. Allocate free buffer space. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to the individual images are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S1202). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and that may be included in one frame of images after the current processing time.

Thereafter, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S1203). In the background calculation process, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding brightness, and projection are calculated for the background image and the background character. It executes the process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as camera information to be used and Z test designation.

After that, arithmetic processing for presentation is executed (step S1204). In the performance calculation processing, processing is performed to calculate and derive the various parameters described above for individual images to be displayed in various performances such as a reach performance, a preview performance, and a jackpot performance.

Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S1205). In the symbol calculation process, the various parameters described above are calculated and derived for the image of the symbol that is subject to variable display in each game round.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S1203 to S1205, a process of updating the control start parameters set in step S1201 is executed. Further, in each process from step S1203 to step S1205, animation data is used that is set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image is updated. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 74, and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 73 by the time the display CPU 72 needs to read it.

Thereafter, a process of determining the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S1206). In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list from among the individual images that have become the control update targets in each process of steps S1203 to S1205 described above. Execute. This understanding is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 72 is greater than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 76, the adjustment is performed in step S1206. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 72 and the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 76 are the same, and in this case, the process of step S1206 is executed. There will be no need.

Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be explained.

The VDP 76 performs a process of setting the value of the register 85 based on a command sent from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on a drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 85 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 87 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds) in cooperation with the geometry calculation section 83 and the rendering section 84. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 86 at a predetermined timing to start outputting the image signal.

The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to explaining the processing, the contents of the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be explained. FIGS. 20(a) to 20(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information is set, which is information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b one frame worth of image related to the drawing list is created. Further, various kinds of designation information are set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the current drawing data, and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information of each image data is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set to be numerical information of serial numbers, and parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence to each numerical information.

In the drawing list in FIG. 20(a), the image data for the back is set as the first drawing target, background object A is set as second, background object B is third, and so on. There is. In addition, image data for presentation is set after the background image data, for example, presentation object A is set as mth, presentation object B is set as m+1st, etc. There is. In addition, image data for symbols is set in order after these image data for presentation, and for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B as n+1, etc. There is.

Note that the order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which each image data is set may be the opposite of the above, and Image data for presentation or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for design is set in the order between image data for predetermined presentation and image data for other presentations. may have been done.

The parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),... , multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20(b), the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the back side includes information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 74, and information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored. Coordinate information indicating the position in the world coordinate system (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) when setting image data for the background, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back side Rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle within the system, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back side, and the scale information for the back side. Uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when setting image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Furthermore, although this coordinate information is set for object data, it is not set for texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with polygons of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 74 in a state attached to the combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 76 when performing texture mapping.

Parameter information (P1) includes camera information including information on coordinates and orientation of a virtual camera when projecting image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and rendering image data for the back. Light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case is set.

In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z-buffer method refers to the distance from the viewpoint of each polygon lined up on the Z-axis sequentially when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in polygons close to the viewpoint is set in corresponding unit areas in frame regions 82a and 82b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also set as a method for performing hidden surface removal. The Z sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each polygon arranged on the Z axis is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 82a and 82b. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each polygon is referenced, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each polygon lined up on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing and arithmetic processing for fusion of the numerical information are executed. Although a detailed explanation of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing using Z sorting will be omitted, it is activated when displaying an effect image.

The parameter information (P1) includes α data specification information indicating whether α data is applied and to which it is applied, and fog specification information indicating whether fog is to be applied and to which it is applied. The α value is the transmission information of the corresponding polygon or pixel. There are two ways to set this α value on the drawing list: a method of uniformly specifying the α value, and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all polygons or all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data refers to transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values. Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, a position in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave.

For other parameters such as parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 20(c), among the various information shown in FIG. 20(b), object information and texture are used instead of information on the image data for the back information is set. These pieces of information include address information of an area where object data is stored in the memory module 74, and address information of an area from which texture data is read in the texture area 81a of the VRAM 75. It is set.

The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that in the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

If a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the process from step S1302 onwards is executed to create drawing data corresponding to the drawing list. In step S1302, it is determined whether execution instruction information for multiple screen effects is set in the current drawing list, and if the execution instruction information is set (step S1302: YES), separate storage processing is performed. Execute (step S1303). These processes will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process in step S1303 is executed, background setting process is executed (step S1304). In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the current drawing list, image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and object data have already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing for that area is executed. After that, in the memory module 74, the address where the image data is stored is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the image data in the local coordinate system are set to the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list. A world conversion process is executed to convert the data into coordinate values in the world coordinate system, and the result is set in the buffer area secured above. If it is located, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In addition, in the background setting process, a control end process is executed to delete background image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already placed in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, a setting process for presentation is executed (step S1305). In the effect setting process, object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data has already been placed in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, the process for starting placement is executed in the same way as described in the background setting process. If it is located, update processing of various parameters is executed. Furthermore, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to delete effect image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, a symbol setting process is executed (step S1306). In the pattern setting process, object data for displaying a pattern is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data has already been placed in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, the process for starting placement is executed in the same way as described in the background setting process. If it is located, update processing of various parameters is executed. In addition, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to delete image data for symbols that are not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing from step S1304 to step S1306, as shown in FIG. 22, the object is specified as a placement target by the drawing list within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes. The scene setting is completed in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale also specified by the drawing list. Note that FIG. 22 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S1307). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is created with the viewpoint as the origin. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set. Camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and a camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 22 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

Thereafter, conversion processing to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S1308). In the conversion process to a visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted to a visual field coordinate system corresponding to a visual field (viewing angle) from a viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, and the individual images that are close to the viewpoint are enlarged, and the individual images that are far from the viewpoint are reduced.

Thereafter, clipping processing is performed (step S1309). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S1308 is grasped with its corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, each individual image is extracted in step S1308 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 22) corresponding to the frame areas 82a and 82b (that is, the pattern display device 41) to be drawn. Clip.

After that, writing processing is executed (step S1310). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. .

Thereafter, drawing data creation processing is executed (step S1311). In the drawing data creation process, each individual image extracted in step S1309 and for which lighting processing has been completed in step S1310 is projected onto the screen area PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, by perspective projection or parallel projection). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image. Basically, projection data is created so that it is arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of image data for effects and background → image data for symbols, except when a multi-screen effect is executed, which will be described later. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the front image is overwritten on the back image. In the drawing data creation process, drawing data is created by executing color information setting processing on the projection data. In the color information setting process, by applying the color information of texture data using UV coordinate values to the object data converted into two-dimensional data by projection, pixels of the object data converted into two-dimensional data by projection are applied. Color information is set in units (that is, in polygon units) or in vertex units. Then, the created drawing data is written as drawing data for one frame into the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is completed within a period of 20 milliseconds. In addition, an image signal is output from the display circuit 86 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already explained, the output of the image signal is This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to an update timing one frame later than the corresponding frame. Furthermore, the display circuit 86 has a selector circuit that alternately switches between the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referenced each time the output of one frame worth of image signals is completed. The frame areas 82a and 82b that are drawing targets are regulated so that they do not become output targets for outputting image signals. Note that steps S1304 to S1309 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation section 83, and steps S1310 and S1311 are the processes executed by the rendering section 84.

<Configuration for performing suggestive performance>
Next, a configuration for performing a suggestive effect executed by the symbol display device 41 will be explained. FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the suggestion effect. Note that the suggestion effect is executed when the display mode is the second display mode.

In the second display mode, as shown in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b), a second display mode is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that makes it possible to notify the content corresponding to the result of the validity judgment in the main MPU 52. character G4 is displayed. In detail, regarding the display contents of the symbols G1 to G3, three cube-shaped base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and numbers are written on the front of each base symbol image G6 to G8. Symbols G1 to G3 are displayed. When displaying the symbols in a variable manner, the base symbol images G6 to G8 are rotated in the vertical direction about the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction passing through the centers of the base symbol images G6 to G8. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed in front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. In addition, in the lower part of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, a number of reservation unit images GR corresponding to the number of pieces of special symbol side reservation information stored in the reservation area RE of the main control device 50 are displayed.

In the second display mode, a suggestion effect display area A1 is set at the upper left corner of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The suggestion effect display area A1 is set so as not to overlap with the base symbol images G6 to G8 including the symbols G1 to G3 and the second display mode character G4. Suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1. A plurality of types of suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are set, and each type of suggestion effect image G11 and G12 corresponds to a different type of reach effect.

When a game round becomes such that a predetermined reach effect can be executed in relation to the display duration of the game time, a suggestion effect image G11 corresponding to the predetermined reach effect is displayed before the start of the game time. . A predetermined reach effect is executed in the game round. On the other hand, in the case where it is possible to execute a predetermined reach effect in relation to the display duration of the game time, a suggestive effect corresponding to the predetermined reach effect is displayed before the start of the game time. If the images G11 and G12 are not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, and furthermore, the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 corresponding to the predetermined reach effect in the relevant game round are not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, the relevant game round In this case, the predetermined ready-to-reach effect is not executed, and instead, an alternative ready-to-reach effect corresponding to the predetermined ready-to-reach effect is executed. In other words, the suggestive effect images G11 and G12 are images that suggest that the corresponding ready-to-reach effect can be executed.

The timing at which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are started to be displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 is earlier than the timing at which the corresponding reach effect is started in the game round, which is the display duration period during which the corresponding reach effect can be executed. There is a previous timing and a predetermined timing in a game round started earlier than the current game round. When the display of the suggestion effect images G11, G12 is started at the former timing, the suggestion effect images G11, G12 are displayed as a kind of preview effect of the game round. When the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed at the latter timing, the special drawing side reservation information that causes the reach effect corresponding to the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 to occur is reserved and stored in the reservation area RE. If this is specified in the destination specifying process in the main side MPU 52 (FIG. 11) and the pending command reception process in the sound and light side MPU 62 (FIG. 13), the special map side pending information becomes subject to digestion before the special map side pending information. Suggestive performance images G11 and G12 will be displayed as a performance in the game round triggered by the special drawing side reservation information.

In the case where the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed at the latter timing, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the special figure side hold information that will cause the reach effect corresponding to the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 to occur is also for hold. Suggestive effect images G11 and G12 will be displayed as effects in a game round that is started in a situation where the game is not stored on hold in area RE. In this case, even if there is no special figure-side pending information stored in the pending area RE and no game is being played, the suggested effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggested effect display area A1. The state displayed will be maintained. Then, when the special figure side pending information is newly acquired, the game round is started with the suggested effect images G11 and G12 being displayed in the suggested effect display area A1.

As the suggestion effect images G11 and G12, a first suggestion effect image G11 and a second suggestion effect image G12 exist. The first suggestive effect image G11 is an image in which the letter "A" is written on a rectangular plate-like image, as shown in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b). The second suggestive effect image G12 is an image in which the letter "B" is written on a rectangular plate-like image, as shown in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b).

The first suggested effect image G11 corresponds to the first special ready-to-reach effect, and is suggested before the start timing of the first special ready-to-reach effect in the game round, which is the display duration period in which the first special ready-to-reach effect can be executed. When the first suggestion effect image G11 is displayed in the effect display area A1, the first special reach effect is executed, and the first suggestion is displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 by the time the first special reach effect starts. When the effect image G11 is not displayed, a first alternative ready-to-reach effect, which is an alternative ready-to-reach effect corresponding to the first special ready-to-reach effect, is executed. The first special ready-to-reach performance and the first alternative ready-to-reach performance have the same execution period, but the types of characters to be displayed and the story of the performance are different. When the first special reach effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot result in the game round in which the first special reach effect is executed is 25%. Therefore, the player expects that the first special reach effect will be executed. On the other hand, the first alternative ready-to-win performance is a performance that can be executed even in a game round having a display continuation period different from the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special ready-to-reach performance. The degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the game round in which the first alternative reach effect is executed is 10%, which is a lower expectation level than in the case where the first special reach effect is executed.

The second suggestion effect image G12 corresponds to the second special reach effect, and is suggested before the start timing of the second special reach effect in the game round, which is the display duration period in which the second special reach effect can be executed. When the second suggestion effect image G12 is displayed in the effect display area A1, the second special reach effect is executed, and the second suggestion is displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 by the time the second special reach effect starts. When the effect image G12 is not displayed, a second alternative ready-to-reach effect, which is an alternative ready-to-reach effect corresponding to the second special ready-to-reach effect, is executed. The second special ready-to-reach performance and the second alternative ready-to-reach performance have the same execution period, but the types of characters to be displayed and the story of the performance are different. When the second special reach effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot result in the game round in which the second special reach effect is executed is 50%, which is a higher expectation level than when the first special reach effect is executed. It becomes. Therefore, the player expects the second special reach effect to be executed. On the other hand, the second alternative ready-to-win performance is a performance that can be executed even in a game round having a display continuation period different from the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the second special ready-to-reach performance. The degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the game round in which the second alternative reach effect is executed is 20%, which is a lower expectation level than in the case where the second special reach effect is executed.

The suggestion effect images G11 and G12 start being displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 when an acquisition effect occurs during the execution of a game round. In the state shown in FIG. 23(a), a game round has started with the first suggestion effect image G11 already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, and all the base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed. In a situation where symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, an acquisition effect indicating that the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 is occurring. After the acquisition effect is finished, both the first suggestion effect image G11 and the second suggestion effect image G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, as shown in FIG. 23(b). If the first suggestion effect image G11 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, the acquisition effect for the first suggestion effect image G11 is not newly executed, and the second suggestion effect image G11 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1. When the suggestion effect image G12 is displayed, the acquisition effect of the second suggestion effect image G12 is not newly executed. In addition, the timing at which the acquisition effect is executed is arbitrary, and the fluctuating display of symbols in some of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is stopped, and the fluctuating display of symbols in the remaining base symbol images G6 to G8 is executed. The configuration may be such that the acquisition performance is executed in a situation where the acquisition performance is executed, the acquisition performance may be executed in a situation where the reach performance is executed, or the acquisition performance is executed in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is executed. A configuration may also be used.

The state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 is ended when the special ready-to-reach effect corresponding to the displayed suggestion effect images G11 and G12 is executed. In addition, the state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 also occurs when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the supply of operating power to the sound and light side MPU 62 is stopped. The process ends when the supply of operating power to the audio-light side RAM 64 is stopped. In addition, the state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 corresponds to a jackpot result without the special reach effect corresponding to the displayed suggestion effect images G11 and G12 being executed. It is also terminated when a game round ends and a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 from continuing to be displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 for a long period of time.

Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 60 for executing the suggestive effect, the special ready-to-reach effect, and the alternative ready-to-reach effect will be explained. FIG. 24(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various information stored in the audio-optical side ROM 63, and FIG. 24(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the audio-optical side RAM 64. be.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the sound-light side ROM 63 includes a table group 63a for controlling the first special reach effect, a table group 63b for controlling the first alternative reach effect, and a table group 63b for controlling the second special reach effect. The table group 63c and the control table group 63d for the second alternative reach performance are stored in advance at the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10.

The first special ready-to-reach performance control table group 63a includes a plurality of types of first special ready-to-reach performance control tables that are referred to by the sound and light side MPU 62 when executing the first special ready-to-reach performance. These control tables for the first special reach effect are common in that they all correspond to the execution of the first special reach effect. The types of preview performances before the start of the reach performance are different. By referring to the control table for the first special ready-to-reach effect by the sound and light side MPU 62, various effects including the first special ready-to-reach effect in the game round in which the first special ready-to-reach effect is executed are displayed on the light emitting unit 44 and This is executed by the speaker unit 45. In addition, by appropriately transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 according to the control table for the first special reach effect, the first special reach effect including the first special reach effect is executed in the game round. Various effects are executed on the symbol display device 41.

The first alternative ready-to-reach effect control table group 63b includes a plurality of types of first alternative ready-to-reach effects control tables that are referred to by the sound and light side MPU 62 when executing the first alternative ready-to-reach effect. These control tables for the first alternative reach effect all have in common that they correspond to the execution of the first alternative reach effect, but the types of reach effects before the first alternative reach effect and the corresponding The types of preview effects before the reach effect starts are different. By referring to the control table for the first alternative reach effect by the sound and light side MPU 62, various effects in the game round in which the first alternative reach effect is executed, including the first alternative reach effect, are displayed on the light emitting unit 44 and This is executed by the speaker unit 45. In addition, by appropriately transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 according to the control table for the first alternative reach effect, the first alternative reach effect including the first alternative reach effect is executed in the game round. Various effects are executed on the symbol display device 41.

FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the first special ready-to-reach performance and the first alternative ready-to-reach performance. Note that FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b) show a pair of relationships in which the contents of performances other than the first special reach performance and the first alternative reach performance (preview performance and other reach performances) are the same. The first special ready-to-reach effect and the first alternative ready-to-reach effect are shown when the control table for the first special ready-to-reach effect and the control table for the first alternative ready-to-reach effect are referred to.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), when the first special ready-to-win effect is executed, the first front side effect is executed in the first front side period Ta from the start timing of the game round. In the first front side effect, a variable display of symbols is executed, and a preview effect is executed in a situation where the variable display of symbols is being executed. Further, when the variable display of some symbols is finished, a ready-to-reach effect is started, and a ready-to-reach effect using various characters and the like is executed. A first special ready-to-reach effect is executed in a first special ready-to-reach period Tb that starts following the first preceding period Ta. In the first special ready-to-reach period Tb, the symbols are stopped and displayed after the first special ready-to-reach effect is executed. Then, the final stop display of the symbols is performed in the final stop period Td that starts following the first special reach period Tb.

On the other hand, when the first alternative reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 25(b), first, in the first preceding period Ta from the start timing of the game round, similarly to the first special reach effect shown in FIG. 25(a). The first front side effect is executed. The contents of the first front side effect are the same as in the case of FIG. 25(a). A first alternative ready-to-reach effect is executed in a first alternative ready-to-reach period Tc that starts following the first preceding period Ta. In the first alternative ready-to-reach period Tc, the symbols are stopped and displayed after the first alternative ready-to-reach effect is executed. Then, the final stop display of the symbols is performed in the final stop period Td that starts following the first alternative reach period Tc.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24(a), the second special reach performance control table group 63c includes a second special reach performance control table that is referred to by the sound and light side MPU 62 when executing the second special reach performance. Contains multiple types. These second special reach performance control tables all have in common that they correspond to the execution of the second special reach performance, but the types of reach effects before the second special reach performance and the corresponding The types of preview effects before the reach effect starts are different. By referring to the control table for the second special reach performance by the sound and light side MPU 62, various performances in the game round in which the second special reach performance is executed, including the second special reach performance, are displayed on the display light emitting unit 44 and This is executed by the speaker unit 45. In addition, by appropriately transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 according to the control table for the second special reach effect, the second special reach effect including the second special reach effect is executed in the game round. Various effects are executed on the symbol display device 41.

The second alternative ready-to-reach effect control table group 63d includes a plurality of types of second alternative ready-to-reach effects control tables that are referred to by the sound and light side MPU 62 when executing the second alternative ready-to-reach effect. These control tables for the second alternative reach effect are common in that they all correspond to the execution of the second alternative reach effect, but they also include the type of reach effect before the second alternative reach effect is started, and The types of preview performances before the start of the reach performance are different. By referring to the control table for the second alternative reach effect by the sound and light side MPU 62, various effects in the game round in which the second alternative reach effect is executed, including the second alternative reach effect, are displayed on the light emitting unit 44 and This is executed by the speaker unit 45. In addition, by appropriately transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 according to the control table for the second alternative reach effect, the second alternative reach effect including the second alternative reach effect is executed in the game round. Various effects are executed on the symbol display device 41.

FIGS. 25(c) and 25(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the second special ready-to-reach performance and the second alternative ready-to-reach performance. In addition, FIG. 25(c) and FIG. 25(d) show a pair of relationships in which the contents of performances other than the second special reach performance and the second alternative reach performance (preview performance and other reach performances) are the same. The second special ready-to-reach effect and the second alternative ready-to-reach effect are shown when the second special ready-to-reach effect control table and the second alternative ready-to-reach effect control table are referenced.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), when the second special ready-to-win effect is executed, the second front side effect is executed in the second front side period Te from the start timing of the game round. In the second front side effect, a variable display of symbols is executed, and a preview effect is executed in a situation where the variable display of symbols is being executed. Further, when the variable display of some symbols is finished, a ready-to-reach effect is started, and a ready-to-reach effect using various characters and the like is executed. A second special ready-to-reach effect is executed in a second special ready-to-reach period Tf that starts following the second preceding period Te. In the second special ready-to-reach period Tf, the symbols are stopped and displayed after the second special ready-to-reach effect is executed. Then, the final stop display of the symbols is performed in the final stop period Td that starts following the second special reach period Tf.

On the other hand, when the second alternative reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 25(d), first in the second front period Te from the start timing of the game round, similarly to the second special reach effect shown in FIG. 25(c). The second front side effect is executed. The contents of the second front side effect are the same as in the case of FIG. 25(c). A second alternative ready-to-reach effect is executed in a second alternative ready-to-reach period Tg that starts following the second preceding period Te. In the second alternative ready-to-reach period Tg, the symbols are stopped and displayed after the second alternative ready-to-reach effect is executed. Then, the final stop display of the symbols is performed in the final stop period Td that starts following the second alternative reach period Tg.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), the sound/light side RAM 64 is provided with a storage area 64a for suggested performance information. The storage area 64a for suggestion performance information is a storage area for storing suggestion performance information, and the suggestion performance images G11 and G12 of the type corresponding to the suggestion performance information stored in the storage area 64a are displayed in the suggestion performance display area A1. will be displayed. Specifically, the suggestion performance information includes first suggestion performance information corresponding to the first suggestion performance image G11 and second suggestion performance information corresponding to the second suggestion performance image G12. When the first suggestion performance information is stored in the storage area 64a of suggestion performance information, the first suggestion performance image G11 is displayed in the suggestion performance display area A1, and the second suggestion performance information is stored in the storage area 64a of suggestion performance information. is stored, a second suggestion effect image G12 is displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1.

Next, the manner in which the suggestion effect, the special ready-to-reach effect, and the alternative ready-to-reach effect are executed will be explained with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 26(a) to 26(f).

FIG. 26(a) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 26(b) shows the period during which the special figure side holding information corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is held and stored in the holding area RE, FIG. 26(c) shows the execution of the first suggestion effect that is started in a situation where it has not been previously specified that the special figure side holding information corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is held and stored in the holding area RE. FIG. 26(d) shows the period of the first special reach effect, which is started in a situation where it has been previously specified that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is held and stored in the hold area RE. FIG. 26(e) shows the execution period of the suggested effect, FIG. 26(e) shows the execution period of the first special ready-to-reach effect, and FIG. 26(f) shows the execution period of the first alternative ready-to-reach effect. In addition, although FIGS. 26(a) to 26(f) show how the first suggestion performance, first special reach performance, and first alternative reach performance are executed, the second suggestion performance and the second special reach performance The second alternative reach effect is also executed in the same manner.

First, the first suggestion effect is started in a situation where it has not been previously specified that the special symbol holding information, which is the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, is held and stored in the holding area RE. , a case where the first special ready-to-win effect is executed after that will be explained.

At timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). Thereafter, at timing t2 during the execution of the game, the first suggestion effect is started as shown in FIG. 26(c). That is, display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 of the symbol display device 41 is started. In this case, the display duration of the current game round is not the display duration period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, but also the display duration period of the game time corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect. The reservation information is not stored in the reservation area RE. Thereafter, the current game round ends at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, even if the game round ends, the display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 continues as shown in FIG. 26(c).

Thereafter, a new game round is executed from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 26(a). Since the display continuation period of the game round is not the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, the first special reach effect is executed even though the first suggestion effect image G11 is displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1. Not done. After that, the special figure side reservation information is not stored in the reservation area RE, and new acquisition of the special figure side reservation information is not performed, so as shown in FIG. 26(a), the timing from t5 to t6 The situation in which no game is played is maintained over the period of . It should be noted that if the situation in which no game round is executed is maintained over the demonstration start reference period, a demonstration display is started on the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, even if the situation in which no game round is executed is maintained, the first suggestion effect image G11 continues to be displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 as shown in FIG. 26(c).

After that, at the timing t6, special figure side reservation information is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 26(b). As a result, a new game round is started at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, the special figure side reservation information acquired at the timing t6 corresponds to the display duration of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, so The display duration period corresponds to the execution of the first special ready-to-reach effect.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 is ended as shown in FIG. 26(c), thereby ending the first suggestion effect, and as shown in FIG. 26(e) The first special reach effect is started as shown in FIG. Then, at timing t9, the first special reach effect ends, and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 26(a).

As mentioned above, the situation where the game round that is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is being executed, and the special figure side hold that is the display continuation period of the game time that corresponds to the execution of the first special reach effect. Display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 may be started even in a situation where information is not stored in the hold area RE. The first suggestion effect image G11 is displayed even when the game round ends and even when the situation where the game round does not start because the special symbol side reservation information is not stored on hold continues. Continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the first special reach effect even in a situation where the game round is not executed. becomes possible.

Next, in a situation where the first suggestion effect is not being executed, a game round that is the display duration period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is started, and the first suggestion effect is not executed in that game time as well. explain.

At timing t10, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). After that, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 26(b), special figure side pending information that is the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special ready-to-win effect is acquired. However, the first suggestion performance is not executed in this game round. Then, at timing t12, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 26(a).

Thereafter, a game round is started at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 26(a). The special figure side pending information that triggered the start of the game round is the special figure side pending information acquired at the timing t11. Therefore, the display continuation period of the current game round is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect. However, the first suggestion performance is not started before the game round starts, and furthermore, the first suggestion performance is not executed in the game round. That is, the first suggestion effect image G11 is not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 at the timing when the ready-to-win effect is started in the current game round. In this case, although the game round is a display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special ready-to-reach effect, the first alternative ready-to-reach effect is started at timing t14 as shown in FIG. 26(f). Then, at timing t15, the first alternative ready-to-win performance ends, and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 26(a).

As mentioned above, even if it is a game round that is a display duration period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, if the first suggestion effect image G11 is not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, the first special reach effect is displayed. is not executed, and instead the first alternative reach effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that displaying the first suggestion effect image G11 is a condition for executing the first special ready-to-reach effect.

Furthermore, even if the game round that is the display duration period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is started in a situation where the first suggestion effect image G11 is not displayed, the first suggestion effect image G11 The first alternative reach effect may be executed without starting the display. As a result, even if the display duration of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is selected, the situation in which the first special reach effect is executed and the situation in which the first alternative reach effect is executed It becomes possible to cause each of these, and it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the reach effect for one type of display duration period.

Next, in a situation where it is previously specified that the special symbol holding information, which is the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, is held and stored in the holding area RE, the first suggestion effect is executed. A case will be described in which the first special ready-to-reach effect is started and then executed.

At timing t16, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). Thereafter, at timing t17, as shown in FIG. 26(b), special figure side pending information is acquired which is the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special ready-to-reach effect. However, the first suggestion performance is not executed in this game round. Then, at timing t18, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 26(a).

Thereafter, a game round is started at timing t19 as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 26(d) at timing t20 during the execution of the game round, the special figure side is held for the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect. The first suggestion effect is started based on the fact that the information is stored in the reservation area RE in the destination identification process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 52. That is, display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 of the symbol display device 41 is started. However, since the display duration of this game round is not the display duration corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, the first special reach effect is not executed and the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 26(a) at timing t21. This game round ends.

Thereafter, a game round is started at timing t22 as shown in FIG. 26(a). The special figure side pending information that triggered the start of the game round is the special figure side pending information acquired at the timing t17. Therefore, the display continuation period of the current game round is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect.

Thereafter, at timing t23, the display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 is ended as shown in FIG. 26(d), thereby ending the first suggestion effect, and as shown in FIG. 26(e) The first special reach effect is started as shown in FIG. Then, at timing t24, the first special ready-to-win effect ends, and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 26(a).

As mentioned above, the first suggestion effect is based on the fact that it has been previously identified that the special figure side hold information, which is the display duration of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, has been held and stored in the hold area RE. is started, and a first special reach effect may be executed in a game round triggered by the special figure side reservation information. As a result, when the first suggestion performance is started after the first suggestion performance has started, the first special in the game round triggered by the special figure side reservation information stored in the reservation area RE. It becomes possible to create a situation in which a reach effect is executed. Therefore, when the first suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first special reach performance may be executed immediately after, and the degree of attention of the player to the first suggestion performance is increased. It becomes possible to increase the

Next, a specific processing configuration for executing the suggestive effect, the special ready-to-reach effect, and the alternative ready-to-reach effect will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62. Note that the effect determination process is executed in step S1003 in the table setting process (FIG. 17).

When the first suggestion performance information is not stored in the storage area 64a of suggestion performance information in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1401: NO), that is, when the first suggestion performance image G11 is not displayed in the suggestion performance display area A1. , executes processing for newly storing the first suggestion effect information in steps S1402 to S1407. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the first period information is stored in the first period information presence/absence area of any of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d in the production side holding area 65 of the sound and light side RAM 64. is determined (step S1402). That is, it is determined whether the special figure side suspension information, which is the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special ready-to-win effect, is suspended and stored in the reservation area RE.

If the first period information is stored (step S1402: YES), that is, the special figure side reservation information, which is the display duration of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect, is reserved and stored in the reservation area RE. If so, a lottery process for generating a first suggestion effect based on the previous specification is executed (step S1403). In the first suggestion performance occurrence lottery process based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the first suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, if the first period information is not stored (step S1402: NO), that is, the special figure side reservation information that is the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect is reserved in the reservation area RE. If it is not stored, a lottery process for generating a first suggestion effect that is not based on the previous specification is executed (step S1404). In the first suggestion performance generation lottery process not based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the probability of the first suggestion performance occurring and winning is lower than in the first suggestion performance generation lottery process based on the first suggestion performance based on the previous specification. Specifically, in the first suggestion performance occurrence lottery process that is not based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the first suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 5%.

After executing the process of step S1403 or step S1404, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the first suggestion effect has been won (step S1405). If the first suggestion performance is generated (step S1405: YES), the first suggestion performance information is stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1406). Thereafter, information on the occurrence of the first suggestion effect is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1407).

The generation information of the first suggestion performance is the sound/light side MPU 62 which informs the sound/light side MPU 62 that the first suggestion performance should be executed to start displaying the first suggestion performance image G11 in the suggestion performance display area A1 during the execution of the current game repeat performance. This information is used to identify the person. When the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, all the base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23) are ), after the acquisition effect indicating that the first suggestion effect image G11 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs, the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs. A control table corresponding to the display effect for which the display of the 1-suggestion effect image G11 is to be continued is read out from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64 in addition to the information on the occurrence of the first suggested performance, so the process is executed at the start of the current game round. In the control table reading process (step S1005), a control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect and information determining the content of other effects is read to the sound/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect is read out, the situation is such that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23). After the acquisition effect indicating that the first suggestion effect image G11 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs, the display of the first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 is continued. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401 or a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the second suggestion effect information is stored in the suggestion effect information storage area 64a in the sound and light side RAM 64 ( Step S1408). If the second suggestion effect information is not stored in the suggestion effect information storage area 64a (step S1408: NO), that is, if the second suggestion effect image G12 is not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, the steps from step S1409 to step The process for newly storing the second suggestion effect information in S1414 is executed.

Incidentally, when the first suggestion performance information is stored in the storage area 64a for suggestion performance information, the process for newly storing the second suggestion performance information in steps S1409 to S1414 is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent both the start of displaying the first suggestion effect image G11 and the start of displaying the second suggestion effect image G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 from occurring in one game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that both the start of display of the first suggestion effect image G11 and the start of display of the second suggestion effect image G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 can occur in one game round. You can also use it as

In the process for newly storing the second suggested performance information in steps S1409 to S1414, first, the second suggestive performance information of any of the first to fourth unit areas 65a to 65d in the performance side holding area 65 of the sound and light side RAM 64 is It is determined whether the second period information is stored in the period information presence/absence area (step S1409). That is, it is determined whether the special figure side suspension information that is the display continuation period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the second special ready-to-win effect is suspended and stored in the reservation area RE.

If the second period information is stored (step S1409: YES), that is, the special figure side reservation information that is the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the second special reach effect is stored in the reservation area RE. If so, a lottery process for generating a second suggestion effect based on the previous identification is executed (step S1410). In the second suggestion performance generation lottery process based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the second suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, if the second period information is not stored (step S1409: NO), that is, the special figure side holding information that is the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the second special reach effect is held in the holding area RE. If it is not stored, a lottery process for generating a second suggestion effect that is not based on the previous specification is executed (step S1411). In the second suggestion performance generation lottery process not based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the probability of the occurrence of the second suggestion performance winning is lower than in the second suggestion performance generation lottery process based on the previous specification. Specifically, in the second suggestion performance occurrence lottery process that is not based on the previous specification, the lottery process is executed so that the second suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 5%.

After executing the process of step S1410 or step S1411, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the second suggestion effect has been won (step S1412). If the second suggestion performance is generated (step S1412: YES), the second suggestion performance information is stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1413). Thereafter, information on the occurrence of the second suggestion effect is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1414).

The generation information of the second suggestion performance is the sound/light side MPU 62 that informs the sound/light side MPU 62 that the second suggestion performance should be executed to start displaying the second suggestion performance image G12 in the suggestion performance display area A1 during the execution of the current game repeat performance. This information is used to identify the person. When the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, all base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23) are ), after the acquisition effect indicating that the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs, the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1. A control table corresponding to the display effect for which the display of the 2-suggestion effect image G12 is to be continued is read out from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the second suggested performance is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, so the processing is executed at the start of the current game round. In the control table reading process (step S1005), a control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second suggestive effect and information determining the content of other effects is read to the sound/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect is read out, the situation is such that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23). After the acquisition effect indicating that the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs, the display of the second suggestion effect image G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 is continued. .

If the process of step S1407 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1408, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, or if the process of step S1414 is executed, after the special effect process is executed (step S1415 ), and other processing is executed (step S1416). In other processing, the content of performances other than the suggestive performance, the special ready-to-reach performance, and the alternative ready-to-reach performance is determined. In this case, if the display continuation period corresponds to a predetermined reach, it is decided to execute a predetermined reach as a reach effect, and information corresponding thereto is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64. Further, if the display continuation period corresponds to a ready-to-reach display other than the predetermined ready-to-reach display, it is decided to execute a presentation other than the predetermined ready-to-reach as a ready-to-reach presentation, and information corresponding thereto is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64. In addition, whether or not to execute the preview performance is determined by a lottery, and if the execution of the preview performance is won, information corresponding to the type of preview performance selected in the lottery is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64. . In the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the control table corresponding to the performance information stored in the sound and light side RAM 64 in the performance determination process (FIG. 27) is read from the sound and light side ROM 64. At the same time, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table is transmitted to the display CPU 72. As a result, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 44, and the speaker section 45 are controlled so that each performance determined in the performance determination process (FIG. 27) is executed in the current game round.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special performance processing executed in step S1415 of the performance determination process (FIG. 27).

If the display duration of the current game round is the display duration corresponding to the execution of the first special reach effect (step S1501: YES), the first suggestion effect information is stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion effect information in the sound/light side RAM 64. By determining whether or not is stored, it is possible to determine whether or not the first suggestion effect image G11 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, or whether the first suggestion effect image G11 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 in the current game round. It is determined whether G11 will be displayed (step S1502). If the first suggestion performance information is stored (step S1502: YES), after clearing the first suggestion performance information from the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information (step S1503), the first special reach performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. The occurrence information of is stored (step S1504).

The occurrence information of the first special ready-to-reach performance is information for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 62 that the first special ready-to-reach performance should be executed in the current game repeat performance. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 and the occurrence information of the first special reach effect is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the left and right After the fluctuating display of symbols in the base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped and the fluctuating display of symbols is started in the base symbol image G7, the initial reach effect is performed. For control corresponding to a display effect in which a first special reach effect is executed after a display effect indicating that the first suggest effect image G11 is to be used in a situation where an initial reach effect is executed. The table is read from the audio-optical side ROM 63 to the audio-optical side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the first special reach performance is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, so at the start of the current game round, In the control table reading process (step S1005) that is executed, the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first special reach effect and information that determines the contents of other effects is read to the sound and light side RAM 64. .

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, if the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first special ready-to-reach effect is read out when an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the left and right base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) After the fluctuation display of symbols is stopped and the fluctuation display of symbols is performed in the base symbol image G7, the initial reach effect is performed, and in the situation where the initial reach effect is being executed, the first reach effect is performed. After the display effect indicating the use of the first suggestion effect image G11 is executed, the first special ready-to-reach effect is executed.

If the first suggestion effect information is not stored (step S1502: NO), a lottery process for the occurrence of the first suggestion effect in the corresponding game round is executed (step S1505). In the first suggestion performance occurrence lottery process in the corresponding game round, the lottery process is executed so that the first suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 25%. If the result of the occurrence lottery process is the winning of the first suggestion effect (step S1506: YES), after storing the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect in the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S1507), the information is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. The occurrence information of the first special reach effect is stored (step S1504).

When the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect and the occurrence information of the first special reach effect are stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, all bases are After an acquisition effect indicating that the first suggestion effect image G11 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs in a situation where the symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23) are displayed in a variable manner. The first suggestion effect image G11 continues to be displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, and furthermore, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped, and the base symbol inside A display effect indicating that an initial ready-to-reach effect is performed after a situation in which a variable display of symbols is performed in image G7, and that the first suggestive effect image G11 is to be used in a situation where the initial ready-to-reach effect is being executed. After this is executed, a control table corresponding to the display effect for which the first special ready-to-reach effect is to be executed is read out from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64. In addition, in the production determination process (FIG. 27), in addition to the occurrence information of the first suggestion production and the occurrence information of the first special reach production, information that determines the content of the production is stored in the sound-light side RAM 64. , In the control table reading process (step S1005) executed at the start of the current game round, the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect, the occurrence information of the first special ready-to-reach effect, and the information determining the content of other effects are used. The corresponding control table will be read out to the audio/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first suggestion effect and the occurrence information of the first special ready-to-reach effect is read out, all the base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23) The first suggestion effect image G11 in the suggestion effect display area A1 after an acquisition effect indicating that the first suggestion effect image G11 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs in a situation where a variable display of is performed. continues to be displayed, and furthermore, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped, and the fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle base symbol image G7. After the initial reach effect is performed, and after the display effect indicating that the first suggested effect image G11 is to be used in the situation where the initial reach effect is executed, the first special reach effect is executed. It will be done.

If the occurrence of the first suggestion effect is not won in the first suggestion effect occurrence lottery process in the corresponding game round (step S1506: NO), the occurrence information of the first alternative reach effect is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64 ( Step S1508). The occurrence information of the first alternative ready-to-win performance is information for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 62 that the first alternative ready-to-reach performance should be executed in the current game repeat performance. When the occurrence information of the first alternative reach effect is stored in the sound-light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (FIG. 23) The initial reach effect is performed after the fluctuation display of the symbol in (see) is stopped and the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed in the base symbol image G7 inside, and after the initial reach effect is executed. , a control table corresponding to the display performance in which the first alternative reach performance is to be executed is read out from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the first alternative reach performance is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, so at the start of the current game round, In the control table reading process (step S1005) to be executed, the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first alternative reach effect and information determining the contents of other effects is read to the sound and light side RAM 64. .

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first alternative reach effect is read out, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped, and the The initial reach effect is performed after the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the base symbol image G7, and after the initial reach effect is executed, the first alternative reach effect is executed. .

If the display duration of the current game round is the display duration corresponding to the execution of the second special reach effect (step S1509: YES), the second suggestion effect information is stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion effect information in the sound/light side RAM 64. By determining whether or not is stored, it is possible to determine whether or not the second suggestion effect image G12 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, or whether the second suggestion effect image G12 is already displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 in the current game round. It is determined whether G12 will be displayed (step S1510). If the second suggestion performance information is stored (step S1510: YES), after clearing the second suggestion performance information from the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information (step S1511), the second special reach performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. The occurrence information of is stored (step S1512).

The occurrence information of the second special ready-to-reach performance is information for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 62 that the second special ready-to-reach performance should be executed in the current game repeat performance. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510 and the occurrence information of the second special reach effect is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the left and right After the fluctuating display of symbols in the base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped and the fluctuating display of symbols is started in the base symbol image G7, the initial reach effect is performed. For control corresponding to a display effect in which a second special reach effect is executed after a display effect indicating the use of the second suggested effect image G12 is executed in a situation where an initial reach effect is executed. The table is read from the audio-optical side ROM 63 to the audio-optical side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the second special reach performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, so at the start of the current game round, In the control table reading process (step S1005) that is executed, a control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second special reach effect and information determining the contents of other effects is read to the sound and light side RAM 64. .

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, if the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second special ready-to-reach effect is read when an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the left and right base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) After the fluctuation display of symbols is stopped and the fluctuation display of symbols is performed in the base symbol image G7, the initial reach effect is performed, and in the situation where the initial reach effect is being executed, the first reach effect is performed. After the display effect indicating the use of the second suggestion effect image G12 is executed, the second special ready-to-reach effect is executed.

If the second suggestion performance information is not stored (step S1510: NO), a lottery process for the occurrence of the second suggestion performance in the corresponding game round is executed (step S1513). In the second suggestion performance occurrence lottery process in the corresponding game round, the lottery process is executed so that the second suggestion performance occurs and wins with a probability of 25%. If the result of the occurrence lottery process is the generation winning of the second suggestion effect (step S1514: YES), after storing the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect in the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S1515), the information is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64. The occurrence information of the second special reach effect is stored (step S1512).

When the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect and the occurrence information of the second special reach effect are stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), After an acquisition effect indicating that the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs in a situation where a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23). The display of the second suggestion effect image G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 will continue, and furthermore, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (see FIG. 23) will be stopped, and the base symbol inside will continue to be displayed. A display effect indicating that an initial ready-to-reach effect is performed after a situation in which a variable display of symbols is performed in image G7, and a second suggestive effect image G12 is to be used in a situation where the initial ready-to-reach effect is being executed. After this is executed, a control table corresponding to the display effect for which the second special ready-to-reach effect is to be executed is read out from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance is stored in the sound-light side RAM 64 in addition to the occurrence information of the second suggestive performance and the occurrence information of the second special reach performance. In the control table reading process (step S1005) executed at the start of the current game round, the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect, the occurrence information of the second special ready-to-reach effect, and other information determining the content of the effect are used. The corresponding control table will be read out to the audio/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second suggestion effect and the occurrence information of the second special reach effect is read out, all the base symbol images G6 to G8 (see FIG. 23) The second suggestion effect image G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 after an acquisition effect indicating that the second suggestion effect image G12 is newly displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 occurs in a situation where a variable display of is performed. continues to be displayed, and furthermore, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6 and G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped, and the fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle base symbol image G7. After the initial reach effect is performed, and a display effect indicating that the second suggested effect image G12 is to be used in the situation where the initial reach effect is executed, a second special reach effect is executed. It will be done.

If the occurrence of the second suggestion effect is not won in the second suggestion effect occurrence lottery process in the corresponding game round (step S1514: NO), the occurrence information of the second alternative reach effect is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64 ( Step S1516). The occurrence information of the second alternative ready-to-win performance is information for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify that the second alternative ready-to-reach performance should be executed in the current game repeat performance. When the occurrence information of the second alternative reach effect is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (FIG. 23) The initial reach effect is performed after the fluctuation display of the symbol in (see) is stopped and the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed in the base symbol image G7 inside, and after the initial reach effect is executed. , a control table corresponding to the display performance in which the second alternative ready-to-reach performance is to be executed is read out from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the second alternative reach performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, so at the start of the current game round, In the control table reading process (step S1005) that is executed, the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second alternative reach effect and information that determines the content of other effects is read to the sound and light side RAM 64. .

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second alternative reach effect is read out, the fluctuating display of symbols in the left and right base symbol images G6, G8 (see FIG. 23) is stopped, and the The initial reach effect is performed after the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the base symbol image G7, and after the initial reach effect is executed, the second alternative reach effect is executed. .

The first suggestion performance information stored in the storage area 64a of suggestion performance information in the sound/light side RAM 64 is erased when the first special reach performance is executed, and is also stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information. The second suggested performance information is deleted when the second special ready-to-reach performance is executed. These first suggestion performance information and second suggestion performance information are deleted when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in addition to these triggers. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, in step S1007 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), clearing process of the storage area 64a of suggested effect information is executed. As a result, the first suggestion performance information and the second suggestion performance information written in the storage area 64a of suggestion performance information are erased at the start of the opening/closing execution mode even in a situation where the corresponding special reach performance is not being executed. Ru. In other words, the first suggestion effect image G11 and the second suggestion effect image G12 displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 are displayed at the start of the opening/closing execution mode even if the corresponding special reach effect is not being executed. be terminated.

As described above, the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 (that is, the first suggestion effect image G11 or A second suggestion effect image G12) may be displayed. Then, when the suggested effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in a game round in which the special ready-to-win effect can be executed, the special ready-to-reach effect is executed. As a result, the player who expects the execution of the special ready-to-win effect expects the execution of the special ready-to-reach effect after the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed. In this case, the state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed is maintained even after the display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 has started and the game round in which the special ready-to-win effect has not been executed has ended. As a result, the state in which the suggestive effect images G11 and G12 are displayed can be maintained over a plurality of game rounds. Therefore, through the display of the suggestive effect images G11 and G12, it is possible to secure a long period during which the player expects execution of the special ready-to-reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The situation where the game round that is the display duration corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect is being executed, and the special figure side hold information that is the display duration of the game time that corresponds to the execution of the special reach effect are in the hold area RE. Display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 in the suggestion effect display area A1 may be started even in a situation that is not one of the situations that are stored as a hold. The display of these suggestive effect images G11 and G12 is performed even when the game round has ended, and even when the situation where the game round does not start because the special drawing side reservation information is not stored on hold continues. Continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for the suggestion effect to be executed, and it is also possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the special reach effect even in a situation where the game round is not executed. .

Even if it is a game round that is a display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect, if the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1, the special reach effect will not be executed. , Instead, an alternative reach effect (that is, a first alternative reach effect or a second alternative reach effect) is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the display of the suggested effect images G11 and G12 is a condition for executing the special ready-to-reach effect.

Even if the game round, which is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect, starts in a situation where the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are not displayed, the display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 starts in that game time. An alternative reach effect may be executed without being executed. As a result, even if the display duration of the game round corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect is selected, a situation in which the special reach effect is executed and a situation in which an alternative reach effect is executed occur, respectively. This makes it possible to diversify the execution modes of reach effects for one type of display duration period.

The suggestion performance information (that is, the first suggestion performance information or the second suggestion performance information) stored in the storage area 64a of the suggestion performance information is cleared when the corresponding special reach performance is executed, but in addition to that, It is also cleared when opening/closing execution mode is started. As a result, the state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 is canceled not only when the corresponding special reach effect is executed, but also when the opening/closing execution mode is executed. That will happen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state in which the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 from continuing for an excessively long time.

Even in a situation where the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 corresponding to the special reach effect are not displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 before the game round that is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect is started. , the special ready-to-win effect may be executed after the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 corresponding to the special ready-to-reach effect are displayed in the suggestion effect display area A1 in the game round. As a result, when the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed in the middle of a game round, the player can expect that the special reach effect corresponding to the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 will be executed in the game round. becomes possible.

The display of suggestion effect images G11 and G12 is based on the fact that it has been previously identified that the special figure side holding information, which is the display duration period of the game round corresponding to the execution of the special reach effect, has been held and stored in the holding area RE. As well as being started, a special reach effect may be executed in a game round that is triggered by the special figure side reservation information. As a result, when the display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 is started, a situation is created in which a special reach effect is executed in a game round triggered by the special figure side pending information stored in the pending area RE. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, when the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a possibility that a special reach effect will be executed in the immediately following game round, and the suggestion effects images G11 and G12 are displayed. It becomes possible to increase the attention level of the players.

<Another form of suggestive performance>
- In a situation where the suggestion effect images G11, G12 are displayed, even if the special reach effect corresponding to the suggestion effect images G11, G12 is not executed, the conditions for ending the display of the suggestion effect images G11, G12 are open/close. The present invention is not limited to the start of the execution mode, and may be configured such that the display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 is ended when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. In addition, the number of games that have been played without executing the special reach effect corresponding to the suggestion effect images G11, G12 after the display of the suggestion effect images G11, G12 has started is equal to or greater than the standard number (for example, 100 times or more). ), the display of the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 may be terminated. In addition, if the time that has passed without starting a game round in a situation where the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are being displayed exceeds the reference time (for example, 600 seconds or more), the suggestion effect images G11 and G12 are displayed. It may also be configured to be terminated. Furthermore, the display of the suggested effect images G11 and G12 may be terminated when a deletion instruction operation is performed on the effect operation devices 48 and 49.

- Although the configuration is such that the execution of the special reach performance is suggested by the suggestion performance images G11 and G12, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the execution of a predetermined preview performance is suggested by the suggestion performance images G11 and G12. Alternatively, the suggestive performance images G11 and G12 may be configured to suggest the execution of a pseudo-variation in which the symbol changes and stops repeatedly in one game round, suggesting that a reach performance will occur. The structure may be suggested by the effect images G11, G12, or the content of the effect executed in the opening/closing execution mode may be suggested by the suggest effect images G11, G12.

・The suggestion effect display area A1 is configured so that a plurality of suggestion effect images G11, G12 can be displayed at the same time, but in a situation where one suggestion effect image G11, G12 is already displayed, another suggestion effect image may be displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display of G11 and G12 is not started, and in a situation where one suggestion effect image G11 and G12 is already displayed, the display of another one suggestion effect image G11 and G12 is started. In this case, the display of the already displayed suggestion effect images G11 and G12 may be terminated.

・Display of suggestion effect images G11 and G12 even in a situation where the special figure side hold information that enables execution of the special reach effect is not held and stored in the hold area RE, instead of in a game round where the special reach effect is not executed. is started, but it is also possible to start displaying the suggestion performance images G11 and G12 corresponding to the special reach effect in the game round, provided that the special reach effect is executed in the game round. Often, on the condition that the special figure side hold information that enables the execution of the special reach effect is stored in the holding area RE, the special figure side hold that becomes the start target before the special figure side hold information. The display of the suggestion performance images G11 and G12 corresponding to the special reach performance may be started in the game round corresponding to the information.

- Regarding the predetermined suggested effect image corresponding to the predetermined reach effect, the special figure side reservation information that enables the execution of the predetermined reach effect is held in the hold area RE, instead of the game round in which the predetermined reach effect is not executed. Although the display starts even if the situation is not memorized, for a specific suggestive effect image corresponding to a specific reach effect, the display starts in the game round in which the specific reach effect is executed or the specific reach effect. The display may be started on condition that the special figure side reservation information that enables execution is stored in the reservation area RE. In this case, even if the display of the predetermined suggestion effect image is started, the predetermined result will be displayed in the game round in which the display started or in the game round corresponding to the special drawing side pending information that is held and stored at the time when the display is started. While it is not confirmed that the reach effect will be executed, if the display of a specific suggestive effect image is started, it is held and stored in the game round or at the time when the display started. It is determined that a specific reach effect will be executed in the game round corresponding to the special figure side pending information. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the specific suggestion effect image.

In particular, by applying the above configuration in a configuration where the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot result is higher with a specific reach effect than with a predetermined reach effect, when the display of the specific suggestive effect image is started, the possibility of a jackpot result is predicted. It is determined that a specific ready-to-win effect that is highly expected to occur will occur at a close timing, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the specific suggestive effect image. Furthermore, even if a predetermined reach effect is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot result will not occur, whereas if a specific reach effect is executed, a jackpot result will definitely occur. , it is determined that a jackpot result will occur at a timing close to the time when the display of the specific suggestion performance image is started, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the specific suggestion performance image.

・Apply the configuration that performs suggestive performance to a configuration where image display is performed using 2D data without using 3D data, instead of a configuration where image display is performed using 3D data. You may.

<Configuration for performing operation effects>
Next, a configuration for performing operation effects executed on the symbol display device 41 will be explained. FIGS. 29(a) to 29(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the operation performance.

As the operation performance, there are a first operation performance and a second operation performance. In the first operation performance, in a situation where the reach performance is being executed, a first performance operation suggestion performance is performed that prompts the player to operate the first performance operation device 48 provided on the upper bulging portion 46. , when the first performance operation device 48 is operated in a situation where the suggestion performance of the first performance operation is being executed, the operation corresponding performance corresponding to the operation is executed, and the suggestion performance of the first performance operation is executed. If the first performance operation device 48 is not operated while the performance is being executed, the operation corresponding performance is not executed. In addition, in a situation where the suggestion performance of the first performance operation is being executed, the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is in an invalid period.

Specifically, when the first operation performance is started, an image corresponding to the shape of the first performance operation device 48 is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 29(a). A first performance operation suggestion image G21 with a text image of "Press the upper button!" is displayed, and a first validity period image G22 indicating the validity period of the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is displayed. There is. In the first operation performance, the valid period (specifically, 3 seconds) of the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is set, but the remaining period of this valid period is set in the first valid period image G22. Display is performed in a manner that is recognizable to the player. In addition, the upper left corner of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is arranged so that it does not overlap with either the first performance operation suggestion image G21 or the first valid period image G22, and the combination of reach symbols in the current game round is displayed. An in-reach clear image G23 is displayed, which is composed of an image showing that the symbols in the final stop symbol row are being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

If the first performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48 in the first operation performance, the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an operation corresponding performance. After the effect image corresponding to is displayed, the effect is performed according to the story of the ready-to-reach effect that has been executed before the first operation effect occurs. In this case, a plurality of types of performance images corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 are set with different expectations for a jackpot result, and in a game round resulting in a jackpot result, the first performance operation device 48 There is a high probability that a type of effect image with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image corresponding to the operation of The probability that a type of effect image with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image increases. On the other hand, if the first performance operation device 48 is not operated during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48 in the first operation performance, the symbol display device 41 displays the operation of the first performance operation device 48. The performance according to the story of the ready-to-win performance that has been executed before the first operation performance is performed without displaying the corresponding performance image.

In the second operation performance, in a situation where the reach performance is being executed, first, a first performance operation suggestion performance that prompts the player to operate the first performance operation device 48 provided on the upper bulging portion 46 is performed. executed. However, in the situation where the suggestion performance of the first performance operation is being executed, the operation of the first performance operation device 48 has not expired, so even if the first performance operation device 48 is operated, the first performance operation device 48 is not activated. 1 The suggestion effect of the effect operation is continued. In addition, in a situation where the suggestion performance of the first performance operation is being executed, not only the first performance operation device 48 but also the second performance operation device 49 are in an invalid period of operation. After the first performance operation suggestion performance is executed, after the redo performance indicating that the operation performance is to be redone, the second performance operation device 49 provided on the lower bulge portion 47 is operated. An operation corresponding to the operation when the second performance operation device 49 is operated in a situation where a suggestion performance of a second performance operation is executed to prompt the player to perform the suggestion performance of the second performance operation. If the second performance operation device 49 is not operated in a situation where the corresponding performance is executed and the suggestion performance of the second performance operation is executed, the operation corresponding performance is not executed. In addition, in a situation where the suggestion performance of the second performance operation is being executed, the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is in an invalid period.

Specifically, when the second operation effect is started, first the already explained first effect operation suggestion image G21 is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 29(a). At the same time, the first valid period image G22 is displayed. In the second operation performance, the validity period of the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not set, but in the first validity period image G22, the remaining validity period is short as in the case of the first operation performance. is displayed in a manner that makes it recognizable to the player. In addition, the upper left corner of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is arranged so that it does not overlap with either the first performance operation suggestion image G21 or the first valid period image G22, and the combination of reach symbols in the current game round is displayed. A ready-to-reach clear image G23 is displayed, which is composed of an image showing that the last stop symbol row is being displayed as a variable display, and an image that shows that the variable display of the symbols in the final stop symbol row is continuing. Even if the first performance operation device 48 is operated in a situation where the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 are displayed, the corresponding performance is not executed.

Thereafter, after a display indicating that the entire validity period has elapsed is displayed in the first validity period image G22, as shown in FIG. 29(b), the display screen P of the symbol display device 41 displays " A redo image G24 with a character image "Redo!" is displayed. Even in a situation where the redo image G24 is displayed, the upper left corner of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is displayed so that it does not overlap with the redo image G24, and the combination of reach symbols in the current game round is displayed. The display of the ready-to-reach clear image G23 consisting of an image showing that the variable display of the symbols of the final stop symbol row is continuing is continued. Note that even if the first effect operation device 48 or the second effect operation device 49 is operated in a situation where the redone image G24 is displayed, the corresponding effect is not executed.

Thereafter, after the redone image G24 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the second effect operation device 49 is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 29(c). A second performance operation suggestion image G25 is displayed that includes an image corresponding to the shape of the image and a character image that reads "Press the lower button!", and a second validity period indicating the validity period of the operation of the second performance operation device 49. Image G26 is displayed. In this case, a valid period (specifically, 3 seconds) of the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is set, but the second valid period image G26 shows the remaining period of this valid period to the player. Display is performed in a manner that makes it recognizable. In addition, the upper left corner of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is arranged so as not to overlap with either the second production operation suggestion image G25 or the second valid period image G26, and the combination of reach symbols in the current game round is displayed. A ready-to-reach clear image G23 is displayed, which is composed of an image showing that the last stop symbol row is being displayed as a variable display, and an image that shows that the variable display of the symbols in the final stop symbol row is continuing.

If the second performance operation device 49 is operated during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49 in the second operation performance, the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an operation corresponding performance. After the effect image corresponding to is displayed, the effect according to the story of the ready-to-reach effect that has been executed before the second operation effect is performed is executed. In this case, a plurality of types of performance images corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 are set with different expectations for a jackpot result, and in a game round that results in a jackpot result, the second performance operation device 49 There is a high probability that a type of effect image with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image corresponding to the operation of The probability that a type of effect image with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image increases. On the other hand, if the second performance operation device 49 is not operated during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49 in the second operation performance, the symbol display device 41 displays the operation of the second performance operation device 49. The performance according to the story of the ready-to-win performance that has been executed before the occurrence of the second operation performance is performed without displaying the corresponding performance image.

Next, how the operation effect is executed will be explained with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 30(a) to 30(i).

30(a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 30(b) shows the valid period of operation of the first performance operating device 48, and FIG. 30(c) shows the execution period of the first performance operating device 48. FIG. 30(d) shows the valid period of operation of the second performance operating device 49, and FIG. 30(e) shows the timing when the second performance operating device 49 was operated by the player. FIG. 30(f) shows the period during which the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 for prompting the player to operate the first performance operation device 48 are displayed. 30(g) shows a period in which the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect operating device 48 is being executed, FIG. 30(h) shows a period in which the redo image G24 is displayed, and FIG. 30(i) indicates the period during which the second performance operation suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26 for urging the player to operate the second performance operation device 49 are displayed.

First, a case where the first operation effect is executed will be described.

At timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 30(a). After that, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the operation period of the first effect operating device 48 becomes valid, and as shown in FIG. 30(f), the first effect operating device is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 for prompting the player to perform the operation of 48 is started. Thereafter, the second performance operation device 49 is operated as shown in FIG. Since it is not the valid period of the operation, the performance corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is not executed.

Thereafter, the first performance operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 30(c) at timing t4, which is the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48. As a result, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the valid period of the operation of the first performance operating device 48 ends, and as shown in FIG. 30(f), the first performance on the symbol display device 41 ends. The display of the operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 is ended. Then, from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the performance corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed as shown in FIG. 30(g). After that, the current game round ends.

Next, a case where the second operation effect is executed will be described.

At timing t6, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 30(a). Thereafter, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 30(f), a first performance operation suggestion image G21 and a first validity period image G22 for prompting the player to operate the first performance operation device 48 on the symbol display device 41 starts to be displayed. However, in a situation where the first effect operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 are displayed, the operation of the first effect operation device 48 does not become valid as shown in FIG. 30(b). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30(c), although the first performance operating device 48 is operated at the timing t8 and the timing t9, the first performance operating device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 30(g). The effect corresponding to the operation 48 is not executed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 30(f), the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 is ended. In this case, the display of the redone image G24 is started on the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 30(h) at the timing t10, and the display of the redone image G24 is continued until the timing t11.

By ending the display of the redone image G24 at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 30(d), the operation of the second effect operation device 49 becomes valid, and the symbol is changed as shown in FIG. 30(i). On the display device 41, display of a second performance operation suggestion image G25 and a second valid period image G26 for prompting the player to operate the second performance operation device 49 is started. Thereafter, the second performance operation device 49 is operated as shown in FIG. 30(e) at timing t12, which is the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49. As a result, at the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 30(d), the valid period of operation of the second performance operating device 49 ends, and as shown in FIG. 30(i), the second performance on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display of the operation suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26 is ended. Although not shown, a performance corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed. After that, the current game round ends.

As described above, when performing the second operation performance, first, the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 that prompt the user to operate the first performance operation device 48 is started. However, since the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid, even if the player who confirms the display operates the first performance operation device 48, the performance corresponding to the operation will not be executed. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player. Thereafter, the redone image G24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, thereby increasing the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Then, in that situation, the display of the second performance operation suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26 that prompt the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is started, and the operation of the second performance operation device 49 becomes effective, When the second performance operation device 49 is operated, a performance corresponding to the operation is executed. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player and increase the player's attention to the operation performance.

In addition, when the first operation performance is executed, a first performance operation suggestion image G21 and a first valid period image G22 that prompt the operation of the first performance operation device 48 are displayed, and the first performance operation device 48 is displayed. When the operation 48 becomes valid and the first performance operation device 48 is operated, the performance corresponding to the operation is executed. As a result, when the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first validity period image G22 are displayed on the symbol display device 41, not only the situation where the first performance operation device 48 is invalid but also the situation where the first performance operation device 48 It becomes possible to create a situation in which this is valid. Therefore, although the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 are displayed during the second operation performance, it is a big surprise to the player who recognizes that the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid. It becomes possible to give gender.

Next, a specific processing configuration for executing the operation effect will be explained. FIG. 31(a) is a flowchart showing the operation performance determination process executed by the sound/light side MPU 62. Note that the operation effect determination process is executed in other processes (step S1416) in the effect determination process (FIG. 27).

If the display continuation period of the current game round is the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the operation performance (step S1601: YES), a lottery process for the operation performance is executed (step S1602). FIG. 31(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of each of the first operation performance and the second operation performance in the operation performance lottery process. As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the operation performance lottery process, if the current game round results in a jackpot, the first operation performance will be selected with a 20% probability, and the second operation performance will be selected with a 30% probability. On the other hand, if the result of the current game round is a loss, the first operation performance will be selected with a probability of 10%, and the second operation performance will be selected with a probability of 5%. As a result, when either the first operation performance or the second operation performance is executed, it is possible to increase the expectation level of the jackpot result, and when the second operation performance is executed, This makes it possible to increase the expectation level of a jackpot result. In addition, in the operation performance lottery process, execution of both the first operation performance and the second operation performance is not selected.

If the result of the lottery process for the operation performance is that the first operation performance has been won (step S1603: YES), the lottery process for the first operation corresponding performance is executed (step S1604). In the first operation corresponding performance lottery process, the type of performance corresponding to the operation to be executed when the first performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48 is selected by lottery. decide. As already explained, a plurality of types of performance images corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 are set with different expectations for a jackpot result, and in a game round that results in a jackpot result, the first performance operation device 48 is set. There is a high probability that a type of effect image with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image corresponding to the operation of 48, and in a game round with a losing result, it corresponds to the operation of the first effect operation device 48. There is a high probability that a type of effect image with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image.

Thereafter, the occurrence information of the first operation performance corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the first operation corresponding performance in step S1604 is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1605). The occurrence information of the first operation performance is information for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify that the first operation performance should be executed in the current game replay. If the occurrence information of the first operation performance is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the reach corresponding to the display duration of the current game round is determined. After the performance is started, the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 that prompt the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is started, and during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48, When the first performance operation device 48 is operated, control corresponding to the display performance that causes the type of first operation compatible performance selected in the first operation compatible performance lottery process in step S1604 to be executed. The table is read out from the audio-optical side ROM 63 to the audio-optical side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the first operation performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, so the process is executed at the start of the current game round. In the control table reading process (step S1005), a control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first operation performance and information determining the contents of other performances is read to the sound/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the first operation performance is read out, the first performance operation device 48 When the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 prompting the operation is started, and the first performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48. The first operation corresponding effect of the type selected in the first operation corresponding effect lottery process in step S1604 is executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery process for the operation performance is that the second operation performance has occurred (step S1606: YES), the lottery process for the second operation corresponding performance is executed (step S1607). In the second operation corresponding performance lottery process, the type of performance corresponding to the operation to be executed when the second performance operation device 49 is operated during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49 is selected by lottery. decide. As already explained, a plurality of types of effect images corresponding to the operation of the second effect operation device 49 are set with different expectations for a jackpot result, and in a game round that results in a jackpot result, the second effect operation device 49 is set. There is a high probability that a type of performance image with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the performance image corresponding to the operation of 49, and in a game round with a losing result, it corresponds to the operation of the second performance operation device 49. There is a high probability that a type of effect image with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot result will be selected as the effect image.

Thereafter, the occurrence information of the second operation performance corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the second operation corresponding performance in step S1607 is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S1608). The occurrence information of the second operation performance is information for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that the second operation performance should be executed in the current game replay. If the occurrence information of the second operation performance is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the reach corresponding to the display duration of the current game round is determined. After the performance is started, the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 that prompt the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is started, after which the redo image G24 is displayed, and then the second performance operation suggestion image G21 is started. The display of the second performance operation suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26 that prompt the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is started, and the second performance operation device 49 is activated during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49. If the operation is performed, the control table corresponding to the display effect is executed from the sound/light side ROM 63, and the type of second operation corresponding effect selected in the second operation corresponding effect lottery process in step S1607 is executed. The data is read out to the sound/light side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the occurrence information of the second operation performance is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, so the process is executed at the start of the current game round. In the control table reading process (step S1005), a control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second operation effect and information determining the content of other effects is read to the sound/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the occurrence information of the second operation performance is read out, the first performance operation device 48 The display of the first production operation suggestion image G21 and the first validity period image G22 that prompt the operation of is started, after which the redo image G24 is displayed, and then the second production operation that prompts the operation of the second production operation device 49 is started. Display of the suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26 is started, and if the second performance operation device 49 is operated during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49, the second operation response is performed in step S1607. The type of performance corresponding to the second operation selected in the performance lottery process will be executed.

In a game game in which a control table corresponding to the execution of the operation performance is read out to the sound and light side RAM 64, the table setting process (FIG. 17) in the sound and light side MPU 62 is performed by the first performance operation device 48 or the second performance. The operation of the operating device 49 is monitored. Specifically, by referring to the current control table, the first operation performance is started in the game round in which the first operation performance occurs, and the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is determined. If it is determined that the validity period has expired (step S1009: YES), it is determined whether or not the first performance operation device 48 is operated (step S1010). When the operation of the first production operation device 48 is occurring (step S1010: YES), a setting process for production operation is executed (step S1013).

In addition, by referring to the current control table, it is possible to determine the validity period of the operation of the second performance operation device 49 when the second operation performance is started in the game round in which the second operation performance occurs. If it is determined that the second performance operation device 49 is being operated (step S1011: YES), it is determined whether or not the second performance operation device 49 is operated (step S1012). When the operation of the second effect operation device 49 is occurring (step S1012: YES), a setting process at the time of effect operation is executed (step S1013). In the setting process at the time of production operation, the contents of various data corresponding to the pointer information set in the current control table corresponding to the remaining validity period of production operation are adapted to the operations of production operation devices 48 and 49. By changing the contents of the operation-corresponding performance to the content of the operation-corresponding performance, the operation-corresponding performance is started. The operation-corresponding performance is executed over the remaining valid period of the performance operation, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed over a predetermined fixed period. The operation-compatible effects include, for example, a cut-in effect of a predetermined character and an additional effect of a predetermined character image.

As described above, in the case of the second operation performance, first, the display of the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 that prompt the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is started. However, since the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid, even if the player who confirms the display operates the first performance operation device 48, the performance corresponding to the operation will not be executed. This makes it possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the case of the second operation performance, the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first valid period image G22 that prompt the operation of the first performance operation device 48 are displayed in a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid. After the operation is performed, the display of the second performance operation suggestion image G25 and the second validity period image G26 that prompt the operation of the second performance operation device 49 in a situation where the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is valid starts. be done. Then, when the second performance operation device 49 is operated during the valid period, a performance corresponding to the operation is executed. As a result, while giving surprise to the player by displaying the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first validity period image G22 in a situation where the operation is not valid, the second performance can be displayed in a situation where the subsequent operation is valid. By displaying the operation suggestion image G25 and the second valid period image G26, a situation is created in which, by operating the second performance operation device 49 in response to the execution of the notification prompting the operation, the performance corresponding to the operation is executed. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the notification that prompts the player to perform the operation.

The first performance operation device 48 is operated in a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid and the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first validity period image G22 are being displayed. Regardless of whether or not the second performance operation suggestion image G25 and the second validity period image G26 are displayed during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49, a situation occurs. This makes it possible to provide the rear notification status even to players who did not operate the first performance operation device 48 for the front notification status.

In the front notification situation that does not involve the valid period of operation, a notification prompting the operation of the first effect operation device 48 is executed, whereas in the rear notification situation that involves the valid period of operation, the second effect is executed. A notification prompting the user to operate the operating device 49 is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the front notification situation and the rear notification situation, and the production operation device that is the target of notification depending on the front notification situation and the rear notification situation. By having 48 and 49 different, it is possible to provide even more surprise to the player.

A redo image G24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 between the front notification situation without the valid period of operation and the rear notification situation with the valid period of operation. This makes it possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the front notification situation and the rear notification situation.

<Another form of operation performance>
- When the second operation performance occurs, the situation is not the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48, and a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 (the first performance operation suggestion image G21 and the first performance operation suggestion image G21) Regardless of whether or not the first effect operation device 48 is operated in the situation where the display of the first effective period image G22 is being executed (that is, the front notification situation), the second effect operation device 49 is subsequently operated. A situation (that is, a rear notification situation) occurs in which a notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 (second performance operation suggestion image G25 and second validity period image G26) is executed during the validity period of However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which a rear notification situation occurs on the condition that the first production operation device 48 is operated a predetermined number of times in a front notification situation. Good too. In this case, it becomes possible to generate the rear notification situation only for players who are interested in operating the performance operation devices 48 and 49. In addition, in this configuration, if the first performance operation device 48 is not operated in the front notification situation, an alternative performance period occurs for the rear notification situation, so that the front side If the first performance operation device 48 is not operated in the notification situation, it becomes possible to execute the corresponding performance. Further, the predetermined number of times may be one time or a plurality of predetermined times.

- In the second operation performance, a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed in the front notification situation, and a notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed in the rear notification situation during the valid period of operation of the second performance operation device 49. Although the configuration is configured such that a notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed, in the rear notification situation, the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not performed during the valid period of operation of the first performance operation device 48. A configuration may also be adopted in which a prompting notification is executed.

- In the front notification situation in the second operation performance, even if the first performance operation device 48 is operated, no performance is executed in response to that operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the first performance operation device 48 is operated in the front notification situation, the performance on the symbol display device 41 does not change, but the configuration may be such that a sound corresponding to the operation is output from the speaker unit 45, A configuration may also be adopted in which a corresponding light emitting effect is performed in the display light emitting section 44.

- When the performance corresponding to the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed, a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is issued in a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid. After execution, not only the case where a notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed in a situation where the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is valid, but also the previous notification situation occurs. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which a notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 may be executed in a situation where the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is valid. In such a configuration, the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is more effective than when the notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed alone in a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is valid. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot result is higher when the notification prompting the operation of the second performance operation device 49 is executed alone in a situation where the operation is valid. As a result, when the second operation performance occurs, in the front notification situation, a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed, whereas in the rear notification situation, the second performance operation is performed. When the notification prompting the player to operate the device 49 is executed, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot result.

- In a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid, the situation where a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed is not as a second operation performance, but as a second performance operation device. 49 may be configured to occur independently without any notification to prompt the operation of the second effect operation device 49 in a situation where the operation of 49 is valid. Even in this case, even though the notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 has been executed, the player may not be able to respond to the fact that the performance corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not executed. It becomes possible to give unexpectedness to In this configuration, the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is more effective than when the notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed in a situation where the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is valid. By configuring the configuration in which the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot result is higher when the notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is executed in a situation where the validity period of the first performance operation device 48 is not valid, the first performance operation device 48 If the performance corresponding to the operation of the first performance operation device 48 is not executed even though the notification prompting the operation is executed, it not only gives surprise to the player but also reduces the chance of winning the jackpot. It becomes possible to expect the occurrence.

・Apply the configuration for performing operation effects to a configuration in which image display is performed using 2D data without using 3D data, rather than a configuration in which image display is performed using 3D data. You may.

<Configuration for performing multiple screen production>
Next, a configuration for performing a multi-screen effect executed by the symbol display device 41 will be described. FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the multi-screen effect.

Multi-screen presentation is performed as a type of reach presentation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the multi-screen effect is executed as a effect other than the reach effect. Multi-screen production means that when a display area divided at the outer edge of the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is set as one display screen, a square frame is displayed as an image within the one display screen. A separate display screen partitioned by is displayed as an additional display screen AP, and images such as characters, effects, and letters are displayed in areas of the display surface P that are not included in the additional display screen AP (hereinafter referred to as base display screen BP). In addition to display effects, this is an effect in which display effects are performed on the additional display screen AP by displaying images such as characters, effects, and letters, which are different from the image display on the base display screen BP.

The additional display screen AP can be changed by changing the display size, changing the position in the direction along the display surface P, changing the position in the depth direction of the display surface P, changing the angle accompanied by changing the normal direction of the additional display screen AP, The angle of the additional display screen AP is appropriately changed without changing the normal direction. The display mode of images such as characters displayed on the additional display screen AP is changed in accordance with the above-mentioned changes in various display modes of the additional display screen AP. For example, when the display size of the additional display screen AP is changed, the display size of an image such as a character displayed on the additional display screen AP is also changed according to the change rate of the display size of the additional display screen AP. In this case, the proportion that the image occupies on the additional display screen AP is not changed. In addition, when the position of the additional display screen AP in the direction along the display surface P is changed, the display position on the display surface P of an image such as a character displayed on the additional display screen AP is also displayed on the additional display screen AP. Changed according to the change in position. In this case, the display position of the image within the additional display screen AP is not changed. Additionally, when the angle is changed due to a change in the normal of the additional display screen AP, the display angle of the image such as a character displayed on the additional display screen AP is also changed according to the change in the angle of the additional display screen AP. . In this case, the display angle of the image based on the normal direction of the additional display screen AP is not changed.

Specifically, regarding the display contents of the multi-screen effect, in the case illustrated in FIG. 32(a), a base character image G31, a base character image G32, and a base variation display image G33 are displayed on the base display screen BP. In this situation, an additional display screen AP is being displayed. The normal direction of the additional display screen AP is slightly inclined to the right with respect to the normal direction of the display surface P. Further, an additional character image G41 and an additional variable display image G42 are displayed on the additional display screen AP. In this case, on the base display screen BP, the base character image G32 is displayed in front of the base character image G31, but on the additional display screen AP, the base character image G32 is displayed in front of the base character image G31. It is displayed as if it is located further back than the character image G32. Therefore, a part of the base character image G31 is hidden by the additional display screen AP, and a part of the additional display screen AP is hidden by the base character image G32. In addition, in both the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42, it is shown that the symbol combinations in the current game round are displayed in a stopped state, and the symbols are displayed in variation according to the final stopped symbol sequence. The image shown is displayed. The combination of ready-to-win symbols displayed in the base variation display image G33 and the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed in the additional variation display image G42 are the same. Note that the base variation display image G33 is displayed at the upper left corner of the base display screen BP, and the additional variation display image G42 is also displayed at the upper left corner of the additional display screen AP.

When the multi-screen presentation progresses from the display situation shown in FIG. 32(a), the display situation becomes as shown in FIG. 32(b). In the display situation shown in FIG. 32(b), the display of the base character image G32 has been completed on the base display screen BP, and the base character image G31 has been moved in response to the display situation shown in FIG. 32(a). Things are changing. In addition, in the base variation display image G33, symbols are continuously displayed in a state where the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is stopped and displayed, and symbols are varied and displayed by the final stopped symbol sequence. Further, the inclination of the normal direction of the additional display screen AP is greater to the right side than in the display situation shown in FIG. 32(a). In this case, the display size of the additional character image G41 on the display surface P is smaller than the display situation shown in FIG. 32(a), and the additional variable display image G42 is substantially invisible. However, even in a situation where the additional variation display image G42 is virtually invisible in this way, by checking the base variation display image G33, it is possible to confirm that the reach effect is being executed and the type of the combination of the reach symbols. It becomes possible to understand.

When the multi-screen effect progresses from the display situation shown in FIG. 32(b), the display situation becomes as shown in FIG. 32(c). In the display situation shown in FIG. 32(c), the operating mode and display position of the base character image G31 have changed compared to the display situation shown in FIG. 32(b). Additionally, the display angle of the additional display screen AP has been changed so that its normal direction matches the normal direction of the display surface P, and its display position has been changed so that it includes the upper left corner of the base display screen BP. has been changed. In this case, the upper left corner of the base display screen BP is the display position of the base variation display image G33, and the additional display screen AP is displayed so as to be located in front of the base variation display image G33. , the base variation display image G33 is entirely hidden by the additional display screen AP. However, even in such a situation that the entire base variation display image G33 is hidden, the additional variation display image G42 on the additional display screen AP is visible. Thereby, by checking the additional variation display image G42, it becomes possible to understand that the ready-to-win effect is being executed and the type of combination of ready-to-win symbols.

By executing the multi-screen effect as described above, an additional display screen AP partitioned by a frame different from the base display screen BP is displayed within the range of the base display screen BP, and an additional display screen AP Not only the display size, display position, and display angle of the image displayed in , but also the display size, display position, and display angle of the additional display screen AP itself are changed as appropriate. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the player with an innovative display effect, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the display effect.

The image that allows the player to recognize that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of reach symbols is not only displayed on the base display screen BP as the base variation display image G33, but also as an additional variation display image G42. It is also displayed on the additional display screen AP. As a result, even if the player is paying attention to either the base display screen BP or the additional display screen AP, it is possible to clearly recognize that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of the reach symbols. It becomes possible.

Although there is a possibility that one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 is not displayed due to the change in the display mode of the additional display screen AP on the base display screen BP, the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 At least one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 continues to be displayed so as not to result in a situation where both of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 are not displayed. As a result, even if the additional display screen AP is configured to move and display including the display range of the base variation display image G33, notification that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of the reach symbols continues to be notified. becomes possible.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data used to execute a multi-screen effect.

The memory module 74 stores in advance object data 91 for the base screen and texture data 92 for the base screen as image data for displaying various images G31 to G33 on the base display screen BP. The memory module 74 also contains object data 93 for the additional screen, texture data 94 for the additional screen, and a board for the additional screen as image data for displaying various images G41 and G42 on the additional display screen AP. Polygon data 95 is stored in advance.

In multi-screen presentation, a world coordinate system for storage is used separately from the normal world coordinate system in situations where 3D image data is handled. Object data 93 for additional screens is arranged in the world coordinate system for separate storage. Then, the world coordinate system for separate storage is projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, and the texture data 94 for the additional screen is used to color the two-dimensional data after the projection. By executing the information setting process, two-dimensional data to be displayed on the additional display screen AP is created. This two-dimensional data for the additional display screen AP is separately stored in a separate storage buffer 96 (see FIG. 5) provided in the VRAM 75 as 2D data for the additional screen.

Thereafter, object data 91 for the base screen is arranged in the normal world coordinate system, and board polygon data 95 for the additional screen is arranged. The board polygon data 95 for the additional screen is configured in a planar shape with no wall thickness, and compared to the object data 91 for the base screen and the object data 93 for the additional screen, which have a wall thickness for displaying characters such as people. This is object data with a small number of polygons per unit display surface. Then, the normal world coordinate system is projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, among the two-dimensional data after the projection, color information setting processing is performed using the texture data 92 for the base screen for the two-dimensional data corresponding to the object data 91 for the base screen. is executed.

On the other hand, for the two-dimensional data corresponding to the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen among the two-dimensional data of the value of which the projection was performed, the two-dimensional data corresponding to the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen is Color information setting processing is performed using two-dimensional data. When setting the color information, by using the UV coordinates of the part of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen that corresponds to the board surface to be displayed, the additional data is saved separately in the separate storage buffer 96. The two-dimensional data for the display screen AP is pasted. In other words, there is a correspondence between each polygon of the portion of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen corresponding to the board surface to be displayed and each pixel of the two-dimensional data for the additional display screen AP stored separately in the separate storage buffer 96. The relationship is uniquely determined, and according to the correspondence relationship, each polygon of the portion of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen corresponding to the board surface to be displayed is separately saved in a separate storage buffer 96. Color information of two-dimensional data for the additional display screen AP is applied. By the way, depending on the display size and display angle of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen, the range of the portion of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen that corresponds to the board surface to be displayed in the two-dimensional data after projection is Therefore, in response to changes in the range, when applying the color information of the two-dimensional data for the additional display screen AP that is stored separately, linear interpolation of each pixel of the color information, pixel thinning, etc. are performed as appropriate. Ru.

A specific processing configuration for executing multi-screen effects will be described below. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for displaying multiple screens executed by the display CPU 72. The multi-screen effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S1204 in the task process (FIG. 19). The calculation process for the multi-screen effect is activated when information regarding the multi-screen effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, each address in the texture area 81a of the memory module 74 or VRAM 75 of the image data 93, 94 for displaying various images of the additional display screen AP is grasped (step S1701). . The image data 93 and 94 include object data and texture data for displaying the additional character image G41, as well as object data and texture data for displaying the additional variable display image G42. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the grasped image data 93 and 94 based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to these image data 93 and 94 in the work RAM 73. Write in the secured area (step S1702). The parameter information includes the display position, display size, and display angle of each of the object data for displaying the additional character image G41 and the object data for displaying the additional variable display image G42 in the world coordinate system for separate storage. etc. are included.

Thereafter, the address in the memory module 74 of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen is determined based on the currently set execution target table (step S1703). Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is stored in the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen in the work RAM 73. It is written in the correspondingly secured area (step S1704). The parameter information includes the display position, display size, display angle, etc. of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen in the normal world coordinate system.

After that, based on the currently set execution target table, each address in the texture area 81a of the memory module 74 or VRAM 75 of the image data 91 and 92 for displaying various images on the base display screen BP is grasped (step S1705 ). The image data 91 and 92 include object data and texture data for displaying the base character image G31, object data and texture data for displaying the base character image G32, and further include base variation display. Object data and texture data for displaying image G33 are included. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the grasped image data 91 and 92 based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to these image data 91 and 92 in the work RAM 73. Write in the secured area (step S1706). The parameter information includes object data for displaying the base character image G31 in the normal world coordinate system, object data for displaying the base character image G32, and object data for displaying the base variation display image G33. This includes display position, display size, display angle, etc.

Thereafter, multi-screen effect execution instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that a multi-screen effect should be executed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1707). When the calculation process for multiple screen effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S1107) includes object data 91 for the base screen, textures for the base screen, etc. Information on instructions to use the data 92, object data 93 for additional screens, texture data 94 for additional screens, and board polygon data 95 for additional screens is set, as well as information on instructions to execute multi-screen effects.

If the execution instruction information for the multi-screen effect is set in the drawing list, the VDP 76 makes an affirmative determination in step S1302 in the drawing process (FIG. 21) to execute separate storage processing (step S1303). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing separate storage processing.

From the address information set in the current drawing list, one or more object data to be displayed this time among the object data 93 for the additional screen is grasped (step S1801). In this case, if the grasped object data has not yet been set to the world coordinate system for separate storage in this multi-screen production, the grasped object data can be used by referring to the information at the above address. , read from the memory module 74 and write to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, parameter information of one or more object data grasped in step S1801 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S1802). In this case, the display position, display size, display angle, etc. of the object data in the world coordinate system for separate storage are grasped.

Thereafter, a setting process for a world coordinate system for separate storage is executed (step S1803). As a result, the one or more object data grasped in step S1801 are set in the world coordinate system for separate storage in a manner corresponding to the parameter information grasped in step S1802. In this case, the object data that has already been set to the world coordinate system for separate save in the previous separate save process and is also set in the current separate save process has already been set to the separate save world coordinate system. Since the parameters are set in the system, only the setting mode is changed according to the parameter information grasped in step S1802. On the other hand, for the object data that is to be set for the first time in this separate save process, the process for setting it in the world coordinate system for separate save is executed, and the object data is set according to the parameter information grasped in step S1802. It is set to the world coordinate system for separate storage.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S1804). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system for separate storage is determined based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space) with the origin as the origin.

Thereafter, conversion processing to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S1805). In the conversion process to the viewing coordinate system, the camera coordinate system is converted to a viewing coordinate system corresponding to the viewing angle (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, each piece of object data is extracted if it is included within the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, object data that is close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and object data that is far from the viewpoint is reduced.

Thereafter, clipping processing is performed (step S1806). In the clipping process, each piece of object data extracted in step S1805 is grasped using the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, each object data extracted in step S1805 is clipped using the space corresponding to the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen as a reference.

After that, writing processing is executed (step S1807). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object data extracted by the clipping process. do.

Thereafter, 2D data creation processing for the additional screen is executed (step S1808). In the 2D data creation process for the additional screen, each object data extracted in step S1806 and for which lighting processing has been completed in step S1807 is projected onto a screen area that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, by perspective projection or parallel projection). ). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto a screen area while performing hidden surface removal on the object data. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. In addition, in the 2D data creation process for the additional screen, 2D data for the additional screen is created by executing a color information setting process on the projection data. In the color information setting process, UV coordinate values are used for object data that has been converted into two-dimensional data by projection, and color information of the texture data 94 for the corresponding additional screen is applied. Color information is set for each pixel (that is, each polygon) or each vertex of the object data.

Thereafter, the 2D data for the additional screen created in step S1808 is stored in the separate storage buffer 96 (step S1809). As a result, when a multi-screen effect is executed, each time a drawing list is output from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76, that is, each time the image of the symbol display device 41 is updated, the world coordinate system for separate storage is 2D data for the additional screen is separately stored in a separate storage buffer 96 using the set object data.

Next, the setting process for multi-screen effects executed by the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The multi-screen effect setting process is executed as a process that includes all steps S1304 to S1306 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). Furthermore, when the execution instruction information for the multi-screen effect is set in the drawing list, the process for setting the multi-screen effect is executed.

The board polygon data 95 for the additional screen is grasped from the address information set in the current drawing list (step S1901). In this case, if the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen has not yet been set to the normal world coordinate system in this multi-screen production, the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen should be set to the above address information. By referring to it, it is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the parameter information of the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S1902). In this case, the display position, display size, display angle, etc. of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen in the normal world coordinate system are grasped.

Thereafter, one or more pieces of object data to be displayed this time among the object data 91 for the base screen is determined from the address information set in the current drawing list (step S1903). In this case, if the grasped object data has not yet been set to the normal world coordinate system in this multi-screen production, the grasped object data can be stored in the memory by referring to the information at the above address. It is read from the module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Furthermore, the parameter information of the one or more object data grasped in step S1903 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S1904). In this case, the display position, display size, display angle, etc. of the object data in the normal world coordinate system are grasped.

Thereafter, a normal world coordinate system setting process is executed (step S1905). As a result, the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen grasped in step S1901 is set in the normal world coordinate system in a manner corresponding to the parameter information grasped in step S1902, and is grasped in step S1903. The one or more pieces of object data obtained are set in the normal world coordinate system in a manner corresponding to the parameter information grasped in step S1904. In this case, the object data that has already been set to the normal world coordinate system in the previous multi-screen effect setting process and is also set in the current multi-screen effect setting process has already been set to the normal world coordinate system. Since the parameters are set in the system, only the setting mode is changed according to the parameter information grasped in step S1902 or step S1904. On the other hand, for the object data that is to be set for the first time in this multi-screen effect setting process, the process for setting it in the normal world coordinate system is executed, and the parameter information grasped in step S1902 or step S1904 is executed. It is set to the normal world coordinate system in a manner according to .

Here, the object data 91 for the base screen and the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen are set to the normal world coordinate system with various parameter information applied, so that the additional display on the base display screen BP is performed. Although it is possible that one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 may not be displayed due to the change in the display mode of the screen AP, there is a situation where both the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 are not displayed. At least one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 continues to be displayed so that the display does not occur. As a result, even if the additional display screen AP is configured to move and display including the display range of the base variation display image G33, notification that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of the reach symbols continues to be notified. becomes possible.

Next, the drawing data creation process for multi-screen effects executed by the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The drawing data creation process for the multi-screen effect is executed as the drawing data creation process in step S1311 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). Further, when the execution instruction information for the multi-screen effect is set in the drawing list, the drawing data creation process for the multi-screen effect is executed.

First, projection processing is executed (step S2001). In the projection process, each object data extracted in step S1309 of the drawing process (FIG. 21) and for which the lighting process was completed in step S1310 is projected onto a screen area that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, using perspective projection or parallel projection). projection). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto a screen area while performing hidden surface removal on the object data. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the front image is overwritten on the back image.

Thereafter, a portion of the projection data created in step S2001 that corresponds to the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen is grasped (step S2002). Then, for the identified portion, color information is set in units of pixels (that is, units of polygons) or units of vertices using the 2D data for additional screens saved in the separate storage buffer 96 (step S2003). In this case, each polygon of the part of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen corresponding to the board surface to be displayed and each pixel of the 2D data for the additional screen stored separately in the separate storage buffer 96 (that is, separately stored The correspondence relationship with each dot of the buffer 96 is uniquely determined, and according to the correspondence relationship, for each polygon of the part of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen that corresponds to the board surface to be displayed, The color information of the 2D data for the additional screen that is separately stored in the separate storage buffer 96 is applied. By the way, depending on the display size and display angle of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen, the range of the portion of the board polygon data 95 for the additional screen that corresponds to the board surface to be displayed in the two-dimensional data after projection is Therefore, in response to changes in the range, linear interpolation of each pixel of the color information, pixel thinning, etc. are performed as appropriate when applying the color information of the 2D data for the additional screen that is stored separately.

Thereafter, a portion of the projection data created in step S2001 that is different from the portion corresponding to the plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen is determined (step S2004). Then, for the identified different portions, color information is set in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices using the texture data 92 for the base screen (step S2005).

As described above, in a situation where a multiple screen effect is executed, at each update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, first, the object data 93 for the additional screen and the texture data 94 for the additional screen are used to create a 2D image for the additional screen. The data is created and saved separately, and then projection data is created with object data 91 for the base screen and plate polygon data 95 for the additional screen set in the normal world coordinate system, and the projection data is On the other hand, drawing data for one frame is created by setting color information using texture data 92 for the base screen and 2D data for the additional screen stored separately. This makes it possible to move and display the additional display screen AP at each update timing on the base display screen BP, while also allowing the video display to be updated at each update timing on the additional display screen AP. . Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an innovative display effect, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41.

On both the base display screen BP and the additional display screen AP, an image is displayed showing how the symbols are displayed in a state where the combination of reach symbols in the current game round is stopped and the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner according to the final stopped symbol sequence. It will be done. The combination of ready-to-win symbols displayed in the base variable display image G33 of the base display screen BP is the same as the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed in the additional variable display image G42 of the additional display screen AP. Thereby, even if the degree of freedom in the display mode of the additional display screen AP is increased, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the combination of ready-to-reach symbols from being impaired.

Although there is a possibility that one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 is not displayed due to a change in the display mode of the additional display screen AP on the base display screen BP, the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 At least one of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 continues to be displayed so as not to result in a situation where both of the base variation display image G33 and the additional variation display image G42 are not displayed. As a result, even if the additional display screen AP is configured to move and display including the display range of the base variation display image G33, notification that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of the reach symbols continues to be notified. becomes possible.

Board polygon data 95 for the additional screen is used as object data for displaying the additional display screen AP. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the data capacity required to store object data.

<Another form of multiple screen production>
-Although the configuration is such that multiple screen effects are executed in the reach effect, a configuration may also be adopted in which the multiple screen effects are executed even in a situation where the reach effect is not executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a multi-screen effect is executed in a situation where a preview effect that occurs in a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed. In this case, an image showing how the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed on each of the base display screen BP and the additional display screen AP.

- In a situation where a multiple screen effect is being executed, a reach notification image that notifies that the reach effect is being executed and the type of combination of reach symbols is displayed on each of the base display screen BP and the additional display screen AP. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notification image may be displayed on either the base display screen BP or the additional display screen AP. For example, if the reach notification image is displayed on the base display screen BP but not displayed on the additional display screen AP, the additional display screen AP should be set so as not to overlap with the display area of the reach notification image on the base display screen BP. By displaying this, the player can confirm the display of the reach notification image on the base display screen BP, no matter how the display mode of the additional display screen AP is changed. In addition, if the reach notification image is displayed on the additional display screen AP but not displayed on the base display screen BP, the additional display screen AP is displayed so that the reach notification image does not become invisible. By doing so, the player can confirm the display of the reach notification image on the additional display screen AP, regardless of where the additional display screen AP is displayed on the base display screen BP.

- Although the content of the image displayed on the additional display screen AP is configured to be newly updated at each update timing of the symbol display device 41, it is not limited to this, and may be updated once for multiple update timings. It may be configured to be updated at a rate of . In addition, the content of the image displayed on the base display screen BP and the content of the image displayed on the additional display screen AP are made such that their respective update timings do not overlap, and the content of the image displayed on the base display screen BP is updated at a rate of once for multiple update timings. It may also be configured to be updated with. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load even when performing multi-screen effects.

・When performing multi-screen production, the 2D data for the additional screen used to display on the additional display screen AP uses a world coordinate system that is set separately from the normal world coordinate system. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D data for the additional screen may also be created using a normal world coordinate system.

<Configuration for special design production>
Next, a configuration for performing a special symbol presentation executed by the symbol display device 41 will be explained. FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the special symbol production.

The special symbol performance is performed as a type of reach performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol performance may be executed as a performance other than the ready-to-reach performance. The special symbol performance is a performance that makes the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols different from the normal display mode in a situation where the ready-to-reach display is executed in the first display mode. In this case, compared to the case where the content of the reach effect is the same except for the presence or absence of the special symbol effect, the expectation of a jackpot result is higher when the special symbol effect occurs than when the special symbol effect does not occur. The degree becomes higher. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes to be selected in the special symbol production are set with different expectations of the jackpot result when selected.

As display modes in the special symbol performance, a first display mode, a second display mode, a third display mode, a fourth display mode, and a fifth display mode are set. The first display mode is a display mode in which the symbols that are the targets of special symbol production are displayed as if they were drawn as black and white drawings. The second display mode is a display mode in which the symbols to be executed in the special symbol presentation are displayed in a crystal-like manner so as to be colorless and transparent except for the line portions. The third display mode is a display mode in which a symbol to be subjected to special symbol production is displayed in such a manner that a continuous wobbling occurs in the outline portion of the symbol. The fourth display mode is a display mode in which the symbols to be executed for the special symbol presentation are displayed with dots attached to the entirety. The fifth display mode is a display mode in which the symbols to be executed in the special symbol production are displayed in a mosaic state as a whole. The expectation level of a jackpot result increases in the order of first display mode<second display mode<third display mode<fourth display mode<fifth display mode.

Specifically, regarding the special symbol production, when the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, "3" is placed on the middle line L2 of each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Since the symbol "3" is stopped, a combination of reach symbols is formed by the "3" symbol. In this situation, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In this case, in FIG. 38(a), the upper and lower "3" symbol images G51 and G52 forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols are in a normal display mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 38(b), the upper and lower "3" symbol images G53 and G54 forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols are in the first display mode, and in FIG. 38(c), the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed. The upper and lower "3" symbol images G55 and G56 forming the 3 are in the fourth display mode.

When a special symbol production is executed, the timing at which the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is changed to the display mode corresponding to the execution of the special symbol production is based on the timing in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. The timing is after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display of symbols was stopped and the ready-to-win effect was started. This makes it possible to start the ready-to-win performance and the special symbol performance in stages, making it possible to increase the player's attention to each performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol performance may be started at the timing when the reach performance starts, or the special symbol performance may be started at the timing when the normal reach performance develops into the special performance. Good too. Further, the special symbol presentation may be started at a timing earlier than the timing at which the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, it is possible to suggest that a reach effect will occur by means of a special symbol effect. In addition, in this configuration, by making only the symbols that form the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols to be executed for the special symbol production, it not only suggests that the special symbol production will cause the ready-to-reach production, but also the special symbol production will cause the ready-to-win symbol to be It becomes possible to suggest in advance the types of symbols forming a combination.

Only the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are subject to the execution of the special symbol presentation. Therefore, even if the special symbol effect is executed, the display mode of the sub-symbols is not changed. In addition, the display mode of the main symbols different from the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is not changed. Furthermore, the display mode of all the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of symbols whose display modes are subject to change when a special symbol production is executed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load when starting a special symbol production. .

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image data used to execute the special symbol production.

The memory module 74 stores in advance a color map data group 101, a partial mask data group 102, a shadow mask data group 103, a line image data group 104, and a numerical image data group 105.

The color map data group 101 includes color map data set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the symbols "1" to "9". FIG. 40(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining color map data 111 set corresponding to the symbol "3". The color map data 111 is set as two-dimensional data, and is set as overall rectangular image data. The color map data 111 includes an image area 111a in which a character image constituting the symbol "3" is set including color information, and a frame set to fill the area around the image area 111a among rectangular image data. A region 111b is set. Image data for displaying a turtle image is set in the image area 111a set corresponding to the symbol "3", and an opaque α value is set as a whole. On the other hand, color information of colorless is set in the frame area 111b, and an α value of completely transparent is set as a whole.

The partial mask data group 102 includes partial mask data set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the numbers "1" to "9". FIG. 40(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the partial mask data 112 set corresponding to the symbol "3". The partial mask data 112 is set as two-dimensional data, and is set as rectangular image data as a whole. In this case, the overall size and outer edge shape of the partial mask data 112 are the same as the color map data 111. The partial mask data 112 includes a mask area 112a for masking some parts of the character image (turtle image) constituting the symbol "3", and a mask area 112a for masking some parts of the character image (turtle image) constituting the "3" design, and A frame area 112b is set to fill the area around the area 112a. In the mask area 112a set corresponding to the symbol "3", data for applying a colorless mask to the turtle's eyes is set, and an α value of completely transparent is set as a whole. ing. On the other hand, color information of colorless is set in the frame area 112b, and an opaque α value is set as a whole. When the color map data 111 and the partial mask data 112 are overlapped with each other in the initial size so that the same reference pixels (top left corner) are aligned, the image area of the color map data 111 The eye portion of the character image 111a and the mask area 112a of the partial mask data 112 completely overlap.

The shadow mask data group 103 includes shadow mask data set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the numbers "1" to "9". FIG. 40(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shadow mask data 113 set corresponding to the symbol "3". The shadow mask data 113 is set as two-dimensional data, and is set as overall rectangular image data. In this case, the overall size and outer edge shape of the shadow mask data 113 are the same as the color map data 111 and the partial mask data 112. The shadow mask data 113 includes a shadow image area 113a representing a shadow that would occur when the character image (turtle image) constituting the symbol "3" is irradiated with light from a predetermined direction, and a square. Of the shape image data, a frame area 113b is set to fill in the periphery of the shadow image area 113a. The shadow image area 113a set corresponding to the symbol "3" has an outer edge portion having the same size and shape as the outer edge portion of the image region 111a in the color map data 111 set corresponding to the symbol "3". is set, and a shadow image is set within the range of its outer edge. In the shadow image area 113a, the outer edge portion and the shadow image portion are set with black color information and an opaque α value, and the other portions are set with color information of colorless. A fully transparent α value is set. On the other hand, color information of colorless is set in the frame area 113b, and an α value of completely transparent is set as a whole. When the color map data 111 and the shadow mask data 113 are overlapped with each other at their initial sizes so that the same reference pixels (top left corner) are aligned, the image area of the color map data 111 111a and the shadow image area 113a of the shadow mask data 113 completely overlap.

The line image data group 104 includes line image data set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the numbers "1" to "9". FIG. 40(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the line image data 114 set corresponding to the symbol "3". The line image data 114 is set as two-dimensional data, and is set as rectangular image data as a whole. In this case, the overall size and outer edge shape of the line image data 114 are the same as the color map data 111, the partial mask data 112, and the shadow mask data 113. The line image data 114 includes a line image area 114a showing the overall outer edge of the character image (turtle image) and the outer edge of each part forming the "3" design, and a line image area of the rectangular image data. A frame area 114b is set to fill the area around 114a. The line image area 114a set corresponding to the "3" pattern is set with image data in which color information of parts other than the lines in the color map data 111 set corresponding to the "3" pattern is removed. has been done. In the line image area 114a, black color information is set for the entire outer edge of the character image (turtle image) and the outer edge of each part, and an opaque α value is set. Color information is set so that the part is colorless, and an α value that is completely transparent is set. On the other hand, color information of colorless is set in the frame area 114b, and an α value of completely transparent is set as a whole. When the color map data 111 and the line image data 114 are overlapped with each other in their initial sizes so that the same reference pixels (top left corner) are aligned, the image area of the color map data 111 111a and the line image area 114a of the line image data 114 completely overlap.

The numeric image data group 105 includes numeric image data set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the digits "1" to "9". As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(i), the symbols "1" to "9" (ie, main symbols) are in a state in which a number image is attached to the corresponding character image. The numeric image data is image data for displaying numeric images. The numeric image data is set as two-dimensional data, and is set as rectangular image data as a whole. In this case, the overall size and outer edge shape of the numerical image data are the same as the color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114. The numeric image data includes a numeric image area that indicates a numeric part, and a frame area that is set to fill in the area around the numeric image area of the rectangular image data. In the numerical image area, color information corresponding to each pattern is set, and an opaque α value is set as a whole. On the other hand, color information of colorless is set in the frame area, and an α value of completely transparent is set as a whole. When the color map data 111 and the numerical image data are superimposed on each other with the same reference pixels (upper left corner part) aligned with each other while keeping the initial size, the image area 111a of the color map data 111 The numerical image area will overlap at a predetermined position in .

When the special pattern effect is not executed, the numerical image data corresponding to the color map data 111 is superimposed on the image data created by superimposing the corresponding line image data 114 on the color map data 111. In this case, only the portion of the line image data 114 and the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set remains on the color map data 111 side. As a result, image data for displaying symbols in a normal display mode is created. Note that symbols other than the "3" symbol are created in the same manner. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

When displaying in the first display mode in the special design production, image data is created in which only the eye portion of the color map data 111 is left by superimposing the corresponding partial mask data 112 on the color map data 111. At the same time, image data is created by performing brush processing on the shadow mask data 113 corresponding to the color map data 111 so that the shadow image area 113a has a rough display mode. Then, by superimposing the former image data on the latter image data, image data in which only the eye part in the color map data 111 is added to the shadow mask data 113 after brush processing is created, and the image By superimposing the corresponding line image data 114 on the data, image data for displaying the corresponding pattern as a black and white drawing is created. Thereafter, corresponding numerical image data is superimposed on the image data. In this case, only the portions of the line image data 114 and numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set are image data in which only the eye portions of the color map data 111 are added to the shadow mask data 113 after brush processing. The image data remains on the side. As a result, image data for displaying the symbols in the first display mode is created. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

When displaying in the second display mode in the special design production, image data is created in which only the eye portion of the color map data 111 is left by superimposing the corresponding partial mask data 112 on the color map data 111. At the same time, image data is created by performing normal processing on the line image data 114 corresponding to the color map data 111 so that an image existing on the back side of the line image area 114a is expressed by refraction. Then, by superimposing the former image data on the latter image data, only the eye part in the color map data 111 is added to the line image data 114 after normal processing processing, and thereby the corresponding pattern is changed to the line part. Create image data that will be colorless and transparent except for crystal-like display. Thereafter, corresponding numerical image data is superimposed on the image data. In this case, only the portion of the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set remains on the image data side where only the eye portion of the color map data 111 is added to the line image data 114 after normal processing processing. The image data becomes . As a result, image data for displaying the symbol in the second display mode is created. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

When displaying in the third display mode in the special symbol production, image data is created by performing a slight wobbling process on the line image data 114 so that a slight wobbling occurs in the line portion of the line image area 114a. . Then, by superimposing the image data on the corresponding color map data 111, the line image data 114 after the slight wobble processing is added to the color map data 111, so that the corresponding pattern is continuous on the outline part. Create image data that will be displayed so that it has some wobbling. Thereafter, corresponding numerical image data is superimposed on the image data. In this case, only the portion of the line image data 114 and the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set remains on the color map data 111 side. As a result, image data for displaying the symbol in the third display mode is created. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

When displaying according to the fourth display mode in the special design production, image data is obtained by performing dot processing on the color map data 111 so that dots with a constant interval and a constant size are generated over the entire image area 111a. Create. Then, the corresponding line image data 114 and the corresponding numerical image data are superimposed on the image data. In this case, only the portion of the line image data 114 and the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set remains on the color map data 111 side after the dot processing is performed. As a result, image data for displaying the symbols in the fourth display mode is created. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

When displaying according to the fifth display mode in the special symbol production, image data is created by performing strong wobble processing on the line image data 114 so that strong wobble occurs in the line portion of the line image area 114a. . Then, by superimposing the image data on the corresponding color map data 111, the line image data 114 after the intensity wobble processing is added to the color map data 111, so that the corresponding pattern is continuous on its outline. Create image data to create a mosaic-like display with large wobbles. Thereafter, corresponding numerical image data is superimposed on the image data. In this case, only the portion of the line image data 114 and the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set remains on the color map data 111 side. As a result, image data for displaying the symbol in the fifth display mode is created. In addition, when overlapping each of the above data, the overlapping is performed by aligning the same reference pixels (top left corner) while keeping the initial size, so the processing at the time of overlapping is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

As described above, by using four types of image data: color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 set for one symbol, six types of character images can be displayed. It becomes possible to create image data for displaying. This makes it possible to display character images in many types of display modes while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

Color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 set for one pattern all have the same size and shape in the initial setting state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when superimposing each image data.

In order to realize each display mode, not only the color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 are superimposed on each other, but also predetermined processing is performed on predetermined image data. This makes it possible to display more complex images in a configuration that can display character images in many different display modes while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special symbol presentation will be explained. FIG. 41(a) is a flowchart showing the special symbol performance selection process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62. The special symbol performance selection process is executed in other processes (step S1416) in the performance determination process (FIG. 27).

If the display continuation period of the current game round is the display continuation period corresponding to the execution of the special symbol performance (step S2101: YES), a special symbol performance execution lottery process is executed (step S2102). In the special symbol performance execution lottery process, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, there is a 20% probability that the special symbol performance will be won. If so, a lottery process is executed so that the special symbol performance will be generated and won with a probability of 10%. As a result, the expectation of a jackpot result is higher when the special symbol effect occurs than when it does not occur.

If the execution of the special symbol performance is won (step S2103: YES), a special symbol performance type lottery process is executed (step S2104). In the special symbol presentation type lottery process, one of the first to fifth display modes is selected with the probability shown in FIG. 41(b). In this case, the selection probability increases in the order of 1st display mode < 2nd display mode < 3rd display mode < 4th display mode < 5th display mode if it is a game session with a jackpot result, and in a game session with a miss result. If so, the selection probability increases in the order of fifth display mode<fourth display mode<third display mode<second display mode<first display mode. As a result, the expectation level for the occurrence of a jackpot result is higher when the (n+1)th display mode is selected than when the nth display mode is selected.

Thereafter, type information of the display mode selected in the special symbol performance type lottery process is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S2105). The display mode type information is the display mode of the symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 during the execution of the current game repeat performance of the special symbol performance selected this time. This is information for specifying in the audio/light side MPU 62 that the display mode should be changed. When the display mode type information is stored in the sound/light side RAM 64, in the control table reading process in step S1005 of the table setting process (FIG. 17), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row are In Z3, the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols is changed to the display mode of the special symbol production selected this time.The control table corresponding to the display effect is changed from the sound and light side ROM63 The data is read out to the side RAM 64. In addition, in the performance determination process (FIG. 27), information that determines the content of the performance in addition to the display mode type information is stored in the sound and light side RAM 64, so this processing is executed at the start of the current game round. In the control table reading process (step S1005), the control table corresponding to the display mode type information and other information determining the contents of the performance is read to the sound/light side RAM 64.

Further, in the command selection process (step S902) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), a display command corresponding to the control table read out to the audio/light side RAM 64 is transmitted to the display CPU 72. By receiving the display command, the display CPU 72 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the control table read out to the sound-light side RAM 64. do. Therefore, when the control table corresponding to the type information of the display mode is read out, the symbols forming the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 after the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect The display mode will be changed to the display mode of the special symbol production selected this time.

Next, the special symbol arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The special symbol calculation process is executed in the symbol calculation process of step S1205 in the task process (FIG. 19). The special symbol calculation process is activated when information about the special symbol performance is set in the currently set execution target table.

If this is the start timing of the special symbol production (step S2201: YES), the types of symbols forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols are grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2202), The type of display mode selected as the special symbol presentation is grasped (step S2203). Then, for the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, parameter information is calculated and derived based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is applied to the workpiece. It is written in an area secured in the RAM 73 corresponding to the symbol (step S2204). In addition, special symbol production start instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that image data of a symbol that is a display mode corresponding to the current special symbol production should be created, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S2205).

After that, based on the currently set execution target table, the symbol display device 41 displays symbols other than symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 at the current image update timing. The symbol to be displayed is grasped (step S2206). Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the symbol based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the symbol (step S2207). .

Thereafter, special symbol production execution instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the special symbol production should be executed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S2208). When the special symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S1107) includes combinations of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Information that specifies that the symbols forming the 2D image are displayed in the display mode selected in the current special symbol production, information that specifies other symbols to be displayed, information that instructs the start of the special symbol production, and the special symbol. Performance execution instruction information is set.

If this time is not the start timing of the special symbol production (step S2201: NO), the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are selected based on the currently set execution target table. Also, the symbols to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the current image update timing are grasped (step S2209). Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the symbol based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the symbol (step S2210). . Thereafter, special symbol production execution instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the special symbol production should be executed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S2208). When the special symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S1107) includes information specifying the symbols to be displayed and special symbol effects. Execution instruction information is set.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the special symbol effect executed by the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43. The drawing data creation process for the special symbol effect is executed as the drawing data creation process in step S1311 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). Further, when special symbol performance execution instruction information is set in the drawing list, the special symbol performance drawing data creation process is executed.

First, projection processing is executed (step S2301). In the projection process, each object data extracted in step S1309 of the drawing process (FIG. 21) and for which the lighting process was completed in step S1310 is projected onto a screen area that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, using perspective projection or parallel projection). projection). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto a screen area while performing hidden surface removal on the object data. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side.

When displaying a symbol in the first display mode, symbol board polygon data is set in the normal world coordinate system in correspondence with each symbol to be displayed. The board polygon data for designs is object data that is configured in a planar shape without wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than object data that has wall thickness for displaying characters such as people. Therefore, the 2D image data created for the symbol is applied to the portion of the projection data after the projection process that corresponds to the board polygon data for the symbol.

After executing the projection process in step S2301, it is determined whether or not special symbol performance start instruction information is set in the current drawing list (step S2302). If the special symbol production start instruction information is set (step S2302: YES) and the display mode selected in the current special symbol production is the first display mode (step S2303: YES), A first creation process is executed (step S2304).

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first creation process. Further, FIGS. 45(a) to 45(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the processing contents of the first creation process. Note that although FIGS. 45(a) to 45(d) illustrate the case where the first creation process is executed for the symbol "3", the same applies to other symbols.

First, the color map data 111 and partial mask data 112 corresponding to the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination are read from the memory module 74 (step S2401). Then, partial image data GD1 is created by superimposing the partial mask data 112 on the color map data 111, leaving only the eye portion in the color map data 111 (step S2402). As a result, partial image data GD1 corresponding to the image shown in FIG. 45(a) is created.

After that, the shadow mask data 113 corresponding to the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination is read from the memory module 74, and the shadow image area 113a is displayed in a rough display mode with respect to the read shadow mask data 113. Brush processing is executed (step S2403). As a result, brush processed image data GD2 corresponding to the image shown in FIG. 45(b) is created.

Thereafter, by superimposing the partial image data GD1 created in step S2402 on the brush processed image data GD2 that has undergone the brush processing, the brush processed image data GD2 after the brush processing is added to the eye in the color map data 111. Superimposed image data GD3 is created in which only the portion of is added (step S2404). As a result, superimposed image data GD3 corresponding to the image shown in FIG. 45(c) is created.

Thereafter, the line image data 114 and numerical image data corresponding to the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination are read from the memory module 74, and the line image data 114 is applied to the superimposed image data GD3 created in step S2404. By overlapping and overlapping the numerical image data, image data GD4 is created to enable the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination to be displayed in the first display mode (step S2406). In this case, only the portion of the line image data 114 and the numerical image data to which the opaque α value is set becomes the image data GD4 remaining on the superimposed image data GD3 side. By executing the process in step S2406, image data GD4 corresponding to the image shown in FIG. 45(d) is created.

In addition, when superimposing each of the above data, the superposition is performed by aligning the same reference pixel (top left corner) with the initial size, so the processing during the superposition is It becomes possible to reduce the load.

Returning to the explanation of the drawing data creation process for the special symbol production (FIG. 43), this is a case where the start instruction information for the special symbol production is set (step S2302: YES) and the information selected in the current special symbol production is If the display mode is the second display mode (step S2305: YES), a second creation process is executed (step S2306). By executing the second creation process, image data is created to enable the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination to be displayed in the second display mode. The method for creating image data to enable display in the second display mode has already been described.

When the start instruction information for the special symbol production is set (step S2302: YES) and the display mode selected in the current special symbol production is the third display mode (step S2307: YES), A third creation process is executed (step S2308). By executing the third creation process, image data is created to enable the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination to be displayed in the third display mode. The method of creating image data to enable display in the third display mode has already been described.

When the start instruction information for the special symbol production is set (step S2302: YES) and the display mode selected in the current special symbol production is the fourth display mode (step S2309: YES), A fourth creation process is executed (step S2310). By executing the fourth creation process, image data is created to enable the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination to be displayed in the fourth display mode. The method for creating image data to enable display in the fourth display mode has already been described.

If the special symbol production start instruction information is set (step S2302: YES) and the display mode selected in the current special symbol production is the fifth display mode (step S2309: NO), A fifth creation process is executed (step S2311). By executing the fifth creation process, image data is created to enable the symbols forming the current reach symbol combination to be displayed in the fifth display mode. The method of creating image data to enable display in the fifth display mode has already been described.

When any of the processes in step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2310, and step S2311 is executed, the image data created in each process is transferred to the special symbol buffer 115 provided in the VRAM 75 (see FIG. 5). (Step S2312). When displaying symbols that form a combination of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 in this special symbol production, the image data stored in the special symbol buffer 115 will be used to display these symbols among the projection data. It is applied to the part corresponding to the board polygon data for the design corresponding to .

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, or if the process in step S2312 is executed, out of the projection data created in step S2301, the symbols for symbols that form the combination of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are The part corresponding to the board polygon data and the part corresponding to the board polygon data for symbols corresponding to the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are grasped (step S2313). Then, for each part that has been grasped, using the image data of the display mode corresponding to the current special symbol effect stored in the special symbol buffer 115, color is applied in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. Information is set (step S2314). In this case, each polygon of the part of the board polygon data for the design corresponding to the board surface to be displayed and each pixel of the image data stored in the special design buffer 115 (that is, each dot of the special design buffer 115 ) is uniquely defined, and according to this correspondence, each polygon of the part of the board polygon data for the design that corresponds to the board surface to be displayed is saved in the special design buffer 115. The color information of the image data is applied.

Thereafter, of the projection data created in step S2301, a portion corresponding to the board polygon data for the symbol corresponding to each symbol other than the symbol grasped in step S2313 is grasped (step S2315). Then, normal symbol data drawing processing is executed (step S2316). In the normal pattern data drawing process, image data is first created for each pattern to be displayed this time using the color map data 111, line image data 114, and numerical image data by the method described above. Then, the created image data is applied to the portion grasped in step S2315 and corresponding to each image data. In this case, color information is set in units of pixels (that is, units of polygons) or units of vertices for each grasped portion using the image data created as described above.

After that, out of the projection data created in step S2301, each portion corresponding to an image other than the pattern is grasped (step S2317). Then, color information is set for each pixel (that is, for each polygon) or for each vertex using the texture data corresponding to each grasped portion (step S2318).

As described above, six types of display modes are supported by using four types of image data: color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 set for one symbol. It becomes possible to create image data that This makes it possible to display one symbol in many types of display modes while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

Color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 set for one pattern all have the same size and shape in the initial setting state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when superimposing each image data.

In order to realize each display mode, not only the color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 are superimposed on each other, but also predetermined processing is performed on predetermined image data. This makes it possible to display more complex images in a configuration that allows one symbol to be displayed in many different display modes while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

For symbols forming a combination of reach symbols, color map data 111, partial mask data 112, shadow mask data 113, and line image data 114 are used to change the display from normal display mode to special symbol effects. While the display is changed to the display according to the display mode, symbols other than the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols continue to be displayed according to the normal display mode. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which when a reach effect occurs, the display mode of all symbols is changed to a display mode corresponding to a special symbol effect. Furthermore, since the symbols whose display mode is to be changed are symbols forming a combination of reach symbols, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the display mode has been changed.

A plurality of types of display modes corresponding to the special symbol production are set, and each of the plurality of display modes has a different degree of expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result depending on the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols.

<Another form of special design production>
・Limited to a configuration in which image data used to display a pattern in a normal display mode when a special pattern effect is not executed is created each time using color map data 111, line image data 114, and numerical image data. Even if the image data for displaying the symbols in the normal display mode when the special symbol presentation is not executed is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as texture data corresponding to each symbol. good. As a result, the symbols for which image data is created in real time are only the symbols that form the combination of reach symbols that are the target of special symbol production, so the drawing data that is executed to display the symbols is created. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of processing.

- When the special symbol production is executed, only the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changed to the display mode corresponding to the special symbol production, The present invention is not limited to this, and the same type of symbols as those forming the combination of the above-mentioned reach symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 may also be configured to be changed to a display mode corresponding to the special symbol effect. It may be configured such that the symbol is changed to a display mode corresponding to a special symbol presentation.

・The configuration for special design production has been changed from a configuration where images are displayed using 3D data to a configuration where images are displayed using 2D data without using 3D data. May be applied.

- The display mode of the special symbol production is not limited to the five types of first to fifth display modes, and may be six, seven, or eight or more types.

<Configuration for performing edge processing>
Next, a configuration for performing an edge processing effect executed by the symbol display device 41 will be explained. FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of edge processing effects.

The edge processing effect is performed as a type of reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the edge processing performance may be executed as a performance other than the reach performance. Edge processing effect refers to a situation in which special character images G61 to G63, which are images representing people, are displayed and a reach effect is executed, and the display mode of the edge portion of the special character images G61 to G63 is changed to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot result. It is a performance that changes to suggest expectations.

Specifically, when the edge processing effect is not performed, the special character image G61 is displayed without any edge processing as shown in FIG. 46(a). On the other hand, when the first edge processing period occurs as an edge processing effect, a continuous shadow appears on the entire outer edge of the special character image G62 and the outer edge of each part, as shown in FIG. 46(b). Image G64 will be displayed. Furthermore, when a second edge processing period occurs as an edge processing effect, a plurality of vertical line images G65 are displayed on both left and right sides of the face part of the special character image G63, as shown in FIG. 46(c). Become.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the overall outer edge of the special character image G62 and each part When the first edge processing in which a continuous shadow image G64 is displayed on the outer edge of the portion is performed, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result is higher. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 46(b), compared to the case where the first edge processing is performed in which a continuous shadow image G64 is displayed on the entire outer edge of the special character image G62 and the outer edge of each part part, As shown in FIG. 46(c), when the second edge processing is performed in which a plurality of vertical line images G65 are displayed on both the left and right sides of the face part of the special character image G63, the expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result is higher. is high.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data used to display special character images G61 to G63.

The memory module 74 stores in advance special character object data 121 and special character texture data 122 as image data for displaying the special character images G61 to G63. When the special character images G61 to G63 are displayed, the object data 121 for the special character and the texture data 122 for the special character are used regardless of whether the edge processing effect is executed or not. In addition, the image data used to display the special character images G61 to G63 is the object data 121 for the special character and the texture data 122 for the special character, regardless of whether edge processing effect is executed or not. Yes, and other image data is not used. The edge processing effect is performed by processing the object data 121 for the special character and the texture data 122 for the special character. This makes it possible to perform edge processing effects while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity in the memory module 74.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the edge processing effect will be explained. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the special character production calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The special character performance calculation process is executed in the performance calculation process of step S1204 in the task process (FIG. 19). The special character rendering calculation process is started when information about the special character is set in the currently set execution target table.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, each address in the memory module 74 of the object data 121 for the special character for displaying the special character images G61 to G63 is grasped, and the special The address of the area where the character texture data 122 is stored is determined (step S2501). Then, for each of the grasped data 121 and 122, parameter information is calculated and derived based on the currently set execution target table, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with these data 121 and 122. is written in the specified area (step S2502). The parameter information includes the display position, display size, display angle, etc. of the special character object data 121 in the normal world coordinate system.

After that, based on the currently set execution target table, whether the current game round is the game round corresponding to the occurrence of the first edge processing period and whether or not it is the update timing of the image corresponding to the first edge processing period. It is determined whether (step S2503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, first edge processing instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the edge processing effect corresponding to the first edge processing period should be executed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. (Step S2504).

After that, based on the currently set execution target table, whether or not the current game round is the game round corresponding to the occurrence of the second edge processing period and the update timing of the image corresponding to the second edge processing period is determined. (Step S2505). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, second edge processing instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the edge processing effect corresponding to the second edge processing period should be executed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. (Step S2506).

Thereafter, special character performance execution instruction information, which is information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the special character images G61 to G63 should be displayed, is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S2507). When the special character rendering calculation processing is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S1107) includes object data 121 for the special character and textures for the special character. Information on instructions to use the data 122 is set, and information on instructions to execute special character presentation is also set. Further, when the process of step S2504 is executed, instruction information for the first edge processing is set in the drawing list in addition to the above information, and when the process of step S2506 is executed, the instruction information of the first edge processing is set in the drawing list in addition to the above information. Instruction information for 2-edge processing is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 76, which has received the drawing list, converts the object data 121 for the special character into normal world coordinates in a manner according to the specified parameter information in the rendering processing (step S1305) in the drawing processing (FIG. 21). system. In this case, the arrangement angle of the special character object data 121 in the normal world coordinate system can be changed within a range of 360 degrees around the axis of the object data 121.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the special character effect executed by the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for the special character effect is executed as the drawing data creation process in step S1311 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). Furthermore, when the special character performance execution instruction information is set in the drawing list, the drawing data creation process for the special character performance is executed.

In the special character performance drawing data creation process, if it is the first edge processing period or the second edge processing period, the clipping process (step S1309) is completed in the visual field coordinate system before executing the projection process (step S2609). In this state, edge extraction processing (steps S2601 to S2608) corresponding to each processing period is executed.

In detail about the edge extraction process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first edge processing period by specifying whether instruction information for the first edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2601). If it is the first edge processing period (step S2601: YES), a first determination range is set as the execution range of the process for specifying whether or not the range is for the first edge processing (step S2602). The first determination range is the entire range of surfaces included in the field of view from the viewpoint of the visual field coordinate system in the special character object data 121 in a state where the clipping process (step S1309) has been completed in the visual field coordinate system. Become.

If it is not the first edge processing period (step S2601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the second edge processing period by specifying whether or not instruction information for second edge processing is set in the current drawing list. is determined (step S2603). If it is the second edge processing period (step S2603: YES), a second determination range is set as the execution range of the process for specifying whether or not the second edge processing is performed (step S2604). The second determination range is the entire range of facial parts included in the field of view from the viewpoint of the visual field coordinate system in the special character object data 121 in a state where the clipping process (step S1309) is completed in the visual field coordinate system. becomes.

When the process of step S2602 or step S2604 is executed, edge determination process is executed (step S2605). In the edge determination process, among the polygons included in the object data 121 for the special character, the polygon targeted for edge determination is located around the object data 121 for the special character within the field of view from the viewpoint of the visual field coordinate system. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to an edge portion that is a boundary, and it is also determined whether or not it corresponds to an edge portion that is a boundary between a plurality of parts of the object data 121 for a special character. That is, in the edge determination process, the polygon targeted for edge determination among the polygons included in the object data 121 for the special character is the entire outer edge of the special character image G62 or each part in the projection data after the projection process. It is determined whether the polygon corresponds to the outer edge of the part.

FIG. 50(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining information set in each polygon of the object data 121 for the special character. As shown in FIG. 50(a), each polygon (T(1) to T(n)) of the object data 121 for the special character has local coordinate information (X(1) to X(n)) and UV Data of a combination of coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) and edge information is set. The local coordinate information (X(1) to X(n)) is information that determines the relative positional relationship of each polygon included in the object data 121 for the special character. The UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) is used to color the part of the projection data created by projection processing that corresponds to the object data 121 for the special character using the texture data 122 for the special character. When setting information, this is information that determines the relative positional relationship with each pixel of the texture data 122 for the special character. The edge information is information corresponding to the result of the edge determination process (step S2605). The edge information of a polygon determined not to correspond to an edge portion in the edge determination process (step S2605) becomes "0", and the edge information of a polygon determined to correspond to an edge portion in the edge determination process becomes "1".

In the configuration in which the information of each polygon in the object data 121 for the special character is set as described above, the UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) corresponds to each pixel of the texture data 122 for the special character. The UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) of each polygon in the object data 121 for special characters is the information that determines the relative positional relationship of each polygon included in other object data. Does not overlap with UV coordinate information. In addition, in the object data 121 for special characters, head parts, face parts, body parts, left hand parts, right hand parts, left foot parts, and right foot parts are set as parts, but polygons within one part are the same. UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) is never set, and the same UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y(n)) is set between polygons of different parts. Not at all. The UV coordinate information of each polygon is aggregated in different predetermined ranges for each object data, and the UV coordinate information (Y(1) to Y( n)) are aggregated into different predetermined ranges.

Specifically, regarding the processing content of the edge determination process, if the first determination range is set in step S2602, the object for the special character in the state where the clipping process (step S1309) is completed in the visual field coordinate system. In the data 121, all polygons of the surface included in the visual field from the viewpoint of the visual field coordinate system are targeted for edge determination. By referring to the UV coordinate information of the polygon that is the target of edge determination and the polygon that is adjacent to the polygon, the polygon that is adjacent to the polygon that is the target of edge determination is designated as a special character. Whether or not the object data 121 includes a polygon included in a part different from the part that includes the polygon targeted for edge determination, and the polygon included in the object data different from the object data 121 for the special character. Determine whether it is included. If any of these polygons are included in the adjacent polygons, it is determined that the polygon that is subject to edge determination corresponds to the edge part, and if the adjacent polygons include any of these polygons. If not, it is determined that the polygon targeted for edge determination does not correspond to an edge portion.

Further, if the second determination range is set in step S2604, the object data 121 for the special character in the state where the clipping process (step S1309) is completed in the visual field coordinate system from the viewpoint of the visual field coordinate system. All polygons of facial parts included in the field of view are subjected to edge determination. By referring to the UV coordinate information of the polygon that is the target of edge determination and the polygon that is adjacent to the polygon, the polygon that is adjacent to the polygon that is the target of edge determination is designated as a special character. It is determined whether the object data 121 includes polygons included in parts different from facial parts, and whether polygons included in object data different from the object data 121 for the special character are included. . If any of these polygons are included in the adjacent polygons, it is determined that the polygon that is subject to edge determination corresponds to the edge part, and if the adjacent polygons include any of these polygons. If not, it is determined that the polygon targeted for edge determination does not correspond to an edge portion.

After executing the edge determination process in step S2605, the edge information of the polygon targeted for edge determination in the edge determination process is set to information corresponding to the result of the edge determination process (step S2606). Specifically, if it is determined that the polygon targeted for edge determination corresponds to an edge portion, "1" is set as the edge information of the polygon targeted for edge determination, and the polygon is determined to be the edge determination target. If it is determined that the polygon that has become the object of the edge determination does not correspond to an edge portion, "0" is set as the edge information of the polygon that is the edge determination target. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(a), although "0" was initially set in the edge information of all polygons in the object data 121 for special characters, step S2605 and step S2606 for each polygon When the process is completed, the edge information of some polygons is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 50(b).

Thereafter, an update process for the edge determination target is executed (step S2607). In the update process, if the first determination range is set in step S2602, the polygons included in the first determination range are set as edge determination targets in a predetermined order. The polygon is changed to the next polygon in the predetermined order. In addition, in the update process, if the second determination range is set in step S2604, edge determination is performed so that each polygon included in the second determination range is subjected to edge determination in a predetermined order. The target polygon is changed to the next polygon in the predetermined order.

Thereafter, it is determined whether edge determination is completed (step S2608). If the first determination range is set in step S2602, polygons in the order after the predetermined last order among the polygons included in the first determination range are subject to edge determination. Determine whether it is. If the second determination range is set in step S2604, among the polygons included in the second determination range, polygons whose order is after the predetermined last order are targeted for edge determination. Determine whether it is. If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2605, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, the process advances to step S2609.

In step S2609, projection processing is executed. In the projection process, each object data extracted in step S1309 of the drawing process (FIG. 21) and for which the lighting process was completed in step S1310 is projected onto a screen area that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, using perspective projection or parallel projection). projection). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto a screen area while performing hidden surface removal on the object data. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the front image is overwritten on the back image.

Here, the edge information that was set for the polygon in the object data 121 for the special character is set in the pixels of the portion of the projection data that corresponds to the object data 121 for the special character. This makes it possible to refer to edge information set in three-dimensional data even in two-dimensional projection data after projection processing.

After that, in the projection data created in step S2609, the parts corresponding to each of the various object data including the object data 121 for the special character are grasped (step S2610), and for each of the grasped parts, the parts for the special character are Using each texture data including the texture data 122 of , color information is set in units of pixels (that is, units of polygons) or units of vertices (step S2611). In this case, the positional relationship of each texture data with each pixel is specified using UV coordinate information.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is the first edge processing period by specifying whether instruction information for first edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2612). If it is the first edge processing period (step S2612: YES), the edge line is created by identifying the edge information set to "1" in the drawing data, which is the data after setting the color information in the projection data. Extract (step S2613). Then, the processing range during the first edge processing period is specified using the edge line as a reference (step S2614). The machining range during this first edge machining period is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The processing range during the first edge processing period is, for example, a predetermined number of pixels (for example, 10) from each pixel constituting the edge line extracted in step S2613 toward the inside of the part corresponding to the object data 121 for the special character. It is set as a range up to.

After that, the first processing is performed on the processing range specified in step S2614 (step S2615). Specifically, by subtracting color information at a predetermined rate for each pixel included in the processing range specified in step S2614, the color information immediately after performing the various drawing processes in step S2611 is Make the color darker than the corresponding color. As a result, drawing data corresponding to continuous shadow images G64 being displayed on the entire outer edge of the special character image G62 and the outer edges of each part portion is created as shown in FIG. 46(b).

If the instruction information for the second edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2616: YES), edges for which "1" is set in the drawing data that is data after color information is set in the projection data. By specifying the information, edge lines are extracted (step S2617). Then, the processing range during the second edge processing period is specified using the edge line as a reference (step S2618). The machining range during this second edge machining period is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The processing range in the second edge processing period is defined as a predetermined range on both the left and right sides of the facial part in the special character image G63, and the predetermined range is specified from the edge line extracted in step S2617.

Thereafter, the second processing is performed on the processing range specified in step S2618 (step S2619). Specifically, the color information of the pixels corresponding to the vertical lines is set to black so that vertical lines are generated at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction in the processing range specified in step S2618. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the display of a plurality of vertical line images G65 on both the left and right sides of the facial part of the special character image G63 as shown in FIG. 46(c) is created.

As described above, the display mode of the special character images G61 to G63 can be changed based on the edge portion without preparing the texture data 122 for the special character corresponding to each of the first edge processing and the second edge processing. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the edge portions of the special character images G61 to G63 while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity required for storing texture data.

The configuration is such that edge portions are specified in three-dimensional data, edge lines are extracted in two-dimensional data using the identification results, and edge processing is performed using the extracted edge lines as a reference. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of identifying edge portions compared to a configuration in which edge portions are specified in two-dimensional data.

Even in a configuration in which edge portions are specified in three-dimensional data, edge processing processing based on the specified edge portions is performed on drawing data that is two-dimensional data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for edge processing.

When processing for identifying edge lines is performed on object data 121 for a special character, which is three-dimensional data, it is determined that each polygon that constitutes the object data 121 for a special character corresponds to an edge line. Edge information indicating whether or not the This makes it possible to check for each polygon whether or not it corresponds to an edge line, making it possible to identify edge lines with high precision.

<Another form of edge processing production>
- The method of specifying the edge line between the object data 121 for the special character and surrounding object data and the edge line between each part of the object data 121 for the special character is limited to a method using UV coordinates. Instead, it may be configured to identify an edge line if, for example, the Z coordinate between adjacent polygons deviates from a reference range that is a reference range when viewed from the viewpoint.

・When an edge line is identified in 3D data, the UV coordinates of polygons existing in the processing range based on that edge line are changed to the UV coordinates for edge processing, and the 2D image after projection is changed. Edge processing may be performed by applying texture data for edge processing to the area in which the UV coordinates have been changed in the data.

<Another embodiment of edge processing performance>
Next, another embodiment of a configuration for performing edge processing effects will be described. In the above embodiment, edge portions are identified in three-dimensional data, but in this embodiment, edge portions are identified in two-dimensional data after projection processing.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing drawing data creation processing for special character effects in this embodiment.

First, projection processing is executed (step S2701). In the projection process, each object data extracted in step S1309 of the drawing process (FIG. 21) and for which the lighting process was completed in step S1310 is projected onto a screen area that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, using perspective projection or parallel projection). projection). In this case, projection data is created by projecting onto a screen area while performing hidden surface removal on the object data. In addition, if a completely transparent α value is set for the polygon targeted for projection, the image data on the back side will be used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value will be changed. Processing is executed so that the fusion of the image data on the back side and the image data on the near side at the standard ratio is performed during the color information setting process, and when the opaque α value is set, In this case, the front image is overwritten on the back image.

After that, in the projection data created in step S2701, the parts corresponding to each of the various object data including the object data 121 for the special character are grasped (step S2702), and for each of the grasped parts, the parts for the special character Color information is set in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices using each texture data including the texture data 122 (step S2703). In this case, the positional relationship of each texture data with each pixel is specified using UV coordinate information.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is the first edge processing period by specifying whether instruction information for first edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2704). If it is the first edge processing period (step S2704: YES), a first determination range is set as an execution range of processing for specifying whether or not the first edge processing is performed (step S2705). The first determination range is the entire range of the portion corresponding to the special character object data 121 in the drawing data in which color information is set.

If it is not the first edge processing period (step S2704: NO), it is determined whether it is the second edge processing period by specifying whether or not instruction information for second edge processing is set in the current drawing list. is determined (step S2706). If it is the second edge processing period (step S2706: YES), a second determination range is set as an execution range of processing for specifying whether or not the range is for second edge processing (step S2707). The second determination range is the entire range of facial parts in the drawing data in which color information is set, which corresponds to the object data 121 for the special character.

When the process of step S2705 or step S2707 is executed, edge determination process is executed (step S2708). In the edge determination process, by using the UV coordinate information of each pixel inherited from the projection data state of the portion corresponding to the special character object data 121 in the drawing data for which color information is set, the special character It is determined whether the image corresponds to an edge portion that is a boundary with respect to the surroundings of the images G61 to G63, and whether or not it corresponds to an edge portion that is a boundary between a plurality of parts of the special character images G61 to G63. Determine. The contents of the UV coordinate information are the same as those explained in the above embodiment. However, the UV coordinate information of each pixel after the projection process is performed is different from the UV coordinate information of each polygon before the projection process is performed due to the combination of multiple UV coordinates and the thinning of the UV coordinates. The information is after.

Specifically, regarding the processing content of the edge determination process, if the first determination range is set in step S2705, the portion of the drawing data for which color information has been set that corresponds to the object data 121 for the special character. All pixels are subject to edge determination. Then, by referring to the UV coordinate information of the pixel that is the target of edge determination and the pixels adjacent to the pixel, the special character Whether the part corresponding to the object data 121 of the object data 121 includes pixels included in a part different from the part including the pixel targeted for edge determination, and object data different from the object data 121 for the special character. It is determined whether the pixel included in the part corresponding to is included. If adjacent pixels include any of these pixels, the pixel subject to edge determination is determined to correspond to the edge part, and if adjacent pixels include any of these pixels. If not, it is determined that the pixel subject to edge determination does not correspond to an edge portion.

In addition, if the second determination range is set in step S2707, all pixels in the portion corresponding to the facial parts of the special character object data 121 in the drawing data for which color information is set are subject to edge determination. shall be. Then, by referring to the UV coordinate information of the pixel that is the target of edge determination and the pixels adjacent to the pixel, the special character Whether the object data 121 for the special character includes pixels included in a part corresponding to a part different from the facial parts, and whether the pixel included in the part corresponding to the object data different from the object data 121 for the special character is included. Determine whether or not it is true. If adjacent pixels include any of these pixels, the pixel subject to edge determination is determined to correspond to the edge part, and if adjacent pixels include any of these pixels. If not, it is determined that the pixel subject to edge determination does not correspond to an edge portion.

After executing the edge determination process in step S2708, the edge information of the pixel targeted for edge determination in the edge determination process is set to information corresponding to the result of the edge determination process (step S2709). FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining information on each pixel in drawing data in which color information is set. As shown in FIG. 52, in each pixel of the drawing data, not only an area for setting color information but also an area for setting edge information is set. In addition to these areas, although not shown, each pixel has an area for setting UV coordinate information. If it is determined that the pixel targeted for edge determination corresponds to an edge part, "1" is set as the edge information of the pixel targeted for edge determination, and the pixel targeted for edge determination is determined to be an edge. If it is determined that the pixel does not correspond to that part, "0" is set as the edge information of the pixel that is the edge determination target.

Thereafter, an update process for the edge determination target is executed (step S2710). In the update process, if the first determination range is set in step S2705, the pixels included in the first determination range are set as edge determination targets in a predetermined order. pixel to the next pixel in the predetermined order. In addition, in the update process, if the second determination range is set in step S2707, edge determination is performed so that each pixel included in the second determination range is subjected to edge determination in a predetermined order. The target pixel is changed to the next pixel in the predetermined order.

Thereafter, it is determined whether edge determination is completed (step S2711). If the first determination range is set in step S2705, the pixels in the order after the predetermined last order among the pixels included in the first determination range are subject to edge determination. Determine whether it is. If the second determination range is set in step S2707, pixels included in the second determination range whose order is after the predetermined last order are subject to edge determination. Determine whether it is. If a negative determination is made in step S2711, the process returns to step S2708, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2711, the process advances to step S2712.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is the first edge processing period by specifying whether instruction information for first edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2712). If it is the first edge processing period (step S2712: YES), an edge line is extracted by specifying pixels for which "1" is set as edge information in each pixel of the drawing data (step S2713). Then, the processing range during the first edge processing period is specified using the edge line as a reference (step S2714). The machining range during this first edge machining period is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The processing range in the first edge processing period is, for example, a predetermined number of pixels (for example, 10) from each pixel constituting the edge line extracted in step S2713 toward the inside of the part corresponding to the object data 121 for the special character. It is set as a range up to.

Thereafter, the first processing is performed on the processing range specified in step S2714 (step S2715). Specifically, by performing color information subtraction processing at a predetermined ratio for each pixel included in the processing range specified in step S2714, the color information immediately after performing the various drawing processing in step S2703 is Make the color darker than the corresponding color. As a result, drawing data corresponding to continuous shadow images G64 being displayed on the entire outer edge of the special character image G62 and the outer edges of each part portion is created as shown in FIG. 46(b).

If the instruction information for the second edge processing is set in the current drawing list (step S2712: NO), by specifying the pixels for which "1" is set as edge information in each pixel of the drawing data, A line is extracted (step S2716). Then, the processing range during the second edge processing period is specified using the edge line as a reference (step S2717). The machining range during this second edge machining period is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The processing range in the second edge processing period is defined as a predetermined range on both the left and right sides of the facial part in the special character image G63, and the predetermined range is specified from the edge line extracted in step S2716.

Thereafter, the second machining process is performed on the machining range specified in step S2717 (step S2718). Specifically, the color information of pixels corresponding to the vertical lines is set to black so that vertical lines are generated at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction in the processing range specified in step S2717. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the display of a plurality of vertical line images G65 on both the left and right sides of the facial part of the special character image G63 as shown in FIG. 46(c) is created.

According to the above configuration, the display mode of the special character images G61 to G63 can be changed based on the edge portion without preparing the texture data 122 for the special character corresponding to each of the first edge processing and the second edge processing. It becomes possible to give. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the edge portions of the special character images G61 to G63 while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity required for storing texture data.

Since this is a configuration that identifies edge portions in two-dimensional data, the accuracy of identifying edge portions is slightly lower than a configuration that identifies edge portions in three-dimensional data. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) The camera (viewpoint) was configured to be set individually for each image data placed in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, a single camera (viewpoint) was set for all image data placed in the world coordinate system. A configuration may also be adopted in which cameras are set in common.

(2) The image data arranged in the world coordinate system may be projected in units of a background image, a performance image, and a pattern image.

(3) Instead of setting color information such as texture mapping after projection, it may be configured to set color information such as texture mapping before projection. Furthermore, in this configuration, when performing the color information setting process, the color information may be set such as pasting texture data only on the surface onto which the image is projected.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 70 is controlled by the audio emission control device 60 based on the command sent from the main control device 50, the display control device 70 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 50. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 70 controls the audio emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio light emission control device 60 and the display control device 70 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 50, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 50 to the audio emission control device 60 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 60 to the display control device 70 are also arbitrary.

(5) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 52) that performs grant determination for determining whether to grant a privilege (occurrence of opening/closing execution mode) to a player;
a benefit granting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 52) that grants a benefit to the player based on the fact that the result of the granting determination is a granting result;
The game replay effect is started and the game replay effect is ended in a state corresponding to the determination result of the award determination as one game time, and the game reuse effect is performed in each game time. (a function of executing the processing of steps S306 to S308 in the main side MPU 52, a function of executing the table setting process in the sound and light side MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Suggestion information (first suggestion effect image G11 or second suggestion Suggestive information providing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1406, S1407, S1413, S1414, S1507, and S1515 in the sound/light side MPU 62) that provides the effect image G12);
Predetermined performance execution means (processing of step S1504 and step S1512 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that executes the predetermined performance when the suggestion information is provided in a game round in which the predetermined performance can be executed. ) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the state in which the suggestion information is provided by the suggestion information providing means is maintained even after the provision of the suggestion information is started and the game round in which the predetermined performance was not performed ends.

According to feature A1, suggestion information suggesting that a predetermined effect may be executed may be provided. Then, when the suggestion information is provided in a game round in which the predetermined effect can be executed, the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, the player who expects the predetermined performance to be executed will expect the subsequent predetermined performance to be executed in response to the suggestion information being provided. In this case, the state in which the suggestion information is provided is maintained even after the game round in which the provision of the suggestion information was started and the predetermined performance was not performed has ended. As a result, the state in which the suggestion information is provided can be maintained over a plurality of games. Therefore, by providing the suggestion information, it is possible to secure a long period during which the player expects execution of the predetermined performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. comprising a period determining means (a function of executing a process for specifying the display continuation period of the game round in the main side MPU 52) for determining the execution period of the game round production;
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the game round in which the predetermined effect can be executed is a game time in the execution period in which the predetermined effect can be executed.

According to feature A2, the predetermined effect is executed in a game time in which the execution period of the game rendition is an execution period in which the predetermined effect can be executed, and in which suggestion information is provided. Become.

Feature A3. If the suggestion information is not provided in a game round in which the predetermined performance can be executed, an alternative performance (a first alternative reach performance or a second alternative reach performance) different from the predetermined performance is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, further comprising an alternative performance execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1508 and step S1516 in the sound and light side MPU 62).

According to feature A3, even in a game round in which the predetermined effect can be executed, if no suggestion information is provided, the predetermined effect is not executed but an alternative effect is executed. As a result, in order for the predetermined performance to be executed, it is necessary to provide the suggestion information in advance, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations regarding the provision of the suggestion information.

Feature A4. Information acquisition means (a function of executing reservation information acquisition processing in the main MPU 52) that acquires special information (special map side reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The provision determination means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to provision correspondence information as the provision determination;
The state in which the suggestion information is provided by the suggestion information providing means is such that the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means after the provision of the suggestion information has started and the game round in which the predetermined effect has not been performed has ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the gaming machine is maintained even if the situation where the game is not stored and the game round is not started continues.

According to feature A4, even if it is possible to start a game round, the state in which the suggestion information is provided is maintained even if the special information is not acquired and the start of the game round is on standby. As a result, the state in which the suggestion information is provided can be maintained over a plurality of game rounds, with the state in which the start of the game round is awaited. Therefore, by providing the suggestion information, it is possible to secure a long period during which the player expects execution of the predetermined performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. Information acquisition means (a function of executing reservation information acquisition processing in the main side MPU 52) that acquires special information (special map side reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The suggestion information providing means provides the suggestion in a game round in which the special information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined performance is not stored in the acquired information storage means and in which the predetermined performance is not performed. Means for starting provision of information (function of executing the processing of step S1406 and step S1407 as a result of step S1404 in the sound-light side MPU 62, executing the processing of step S1413 and step S1414 as a result of step S1411 in the sound-light side MPU 62) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following functions.

According to feature A5, the provision of suggestion information is started in a game run in which the special information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined performance is not stored in the acquired information storage means and in which the predetermined performance is not executed. obtain. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in timing when the provision of suggestion information is started.

Feature A6. The suggestion information providing means includes means for canceling the state in which the suggestion information is provided when the predetermined performance is executed (a function of executing the processing of step S1503 and step S1511 in the sound-light side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

According to feature A6, when the predetermined performance is executed, the state in which the suggestive information is provided is canceled, so that it is possible to prevent the state in which the suggestive information is provided from continuing excessively. At the same time, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the suggestion information is related to the execution of the predetermined performance.

Feature A7. The suggestion information providing means is a canceling means (processing of step S1007 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that cancels the state in which the suggestion information is provided when a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied even if the predetermined effect is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function:

According to feature A7, even if the predetermined performance is not executed, if the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the state in which the suggestion information is provided is released. This makes it possible to prevent the state in which suggestive information is provided from continuing excessively.

Feature A8. When a game round in which the predetermined performance can be performed is started in a situation where the suggestion information is not provided, the suggestive information providing means is configured to provide information before the start timing of the predetermined performance in the game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for starting providing the suggestion information (a function of executing the processing of step S1507 and step S1515 in the sound-light side MPU 62). .

According to feature A8, a predetermined effect may be executed in a game round in which the provision of suggestion information is started. A player who confirms such an event will expect that a predetermined effect will be executed in that game round when the provision of suggestion information is started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the provision of suggestion information.

Feature A9. Information acquisition means (a function of executing reservation information acquisition processing in the main side MPU 52) that acquires special information (special map side reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
When the special information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined performance is stored in the acquired information storage means, the suggestive information providing means is configured to provide information that is triggered by the special information that is to be digested before the special information. Means for starting the provision of the suggestion information in a game round in which the predetermined effect is not executed (a function of executing the processing of step S1406 and step S1407 as a result of step S1403 in the sound and light side MPU 62, The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S1413 and S1414 as a result of step S1410.

According to feature A9, provision of suggestion information may be started in a game run executed in a situation where special information corresponding to the execution of a predetermined performance is stored in the acquired information storage means. As a result, it is possible to start providing suggestion information in situations where it is certain that the subsequent game session will be a game session in which the predetermined effect can be executed, and players who have confirmed such an event will be able to start providing suggestion information. When the provision of information is started, it is expected that a predetermined effect will be executed in a subsequent game round. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the provision of suggestion information.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D6, and features E1 to E5 are applied to the configurations of features A1 to A9, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A performance operation means (a first performance operation device 48, a second performance operation device 49) that can be operated by a player;
A first predetermined notification means (a step in the sound and light side MPU 62) for causing a predetermined notification (suggestive performance of the first performance operation) to be executed to prompt the operation of the performance operation means during the valid period of the operation of the performance operation means. function to execute the process of S1605),
an operation-compatible performance execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1013 in the sound-light side MPU 62) for executing an operation-corresponding performance based on the operation of the performance operation means during the validity period;
A second predetermined notification means (by executing the process of step S1608 in the sound and light side MPU 62, the first effect is executed) so that the predetermined notification (suggestion effect of the first effect operation) is executed in a situation where the validity period is not over. (a function that allows operation suggestions to be executed),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, a predetermined notification prompting the operation of the performance operation means is executed during the validity period of the operation of the performance operation means, and when the performance operation means is operated in response, a performance corresponding to the operation is executed. be done. In this configuration, a predetermined notification that prompts the user to operate the production operation means may be executed in a situation where the validity period is not valid. In this case, even if the presentation operation means is operated in spite of the situation where the predetermined notification is being executed, the operation corresponding presentation will not be executed in response to the operation. This makes it possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Feature B2. When the predetermined notification is executed by the second predetermined notification means in a situation that is not within the valid period, the valid period is generated thereafter, and the predetermined notification (suggestion performance of the second performance operation) is executed during the valid period. The present invention is characterized by comprising a third predetermined notification means (a function that causes the sound/light side MPU 62 to execute the process of step S1608 to cause the suggestion performance of the second performance operation to be executed). The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to feature B2, if the predetermined notification prompting the operation of the production operation means is executed in a situation that is not in the valid period, the predetermined notification is executed during the validity period when the operation of the production operation means becomes valid thereafter. be done. As a result, even if the performance operation means is operated even though the predetermined notification is being executed, the performance corresponding to the operation will not be executed, which will surprise the player. While giving the player a sense of control, the execution of the predetermined notification on the rear side causes a situation in which an operation corresponding effect is executed by operating the effect operation means in response to the execution of the predetermined notification, thereby attracting the player to the predetermined notification. It is possible to attract attention.

Feature B3. The third predetermined notification means is configured to notify the user of the validity period regardless of whether or not the presentation operation means is operated when the second predetermined notification unit executes the predetermined notification in a situation that is not within the validity period. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that a period is generated and the predetermined notification is executed during the valid period.

According to feature B3, regardless of whether or not the production operation means is operated in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed in a situation that is not in the valid period, the predetermined notification is subsequently executed in a situation in which the valid period is in effect. occurs. This makes it possible to provide the execution period of the subsequent predetermined notification even to a player who did not operate the effect operation means for the execution of the previous predetermined notification.

Feature B4. The performance operation means includes a first performance operation means (first performance operation device 48) and a second performance operation means (second performance operation device 49),
The second predetermined notification means executes, as the predetermined notification, a notification that prompts an operation of the first performance operation means,
The third predetermined notification means is configured to determine the validity period during which the operation of the second effect operation means becomes valid after the second predetermined notification unit executes the predetermined notification in a situation that is not within the validity period. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, characterized in that a notification prompting the user to operate the second effect operation means is executed during the valid period.

According to feature B4, in the earlier predetermined notification without a validity period, a notification prompting the operation of the first performance operation means is executed, whereas in the rear predetermined notification with a validity period, the second notification is executed. A notification prompting the user to operate the production operation means is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the front predetermined notification and the rear predetermined notification, and the performance operation means to be notified by the front predetermined notification and the rear predetermined notification. By having different values, it is possible to provide even more surprise to the player.

Feature B5. When the second predetermined notification means executes the predetermined notification in a situation that is not within the validity period, the third predetermined notification means executes an intermediate effect (redo effect) after the completion of the predetermined notification, and then The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that a valid period is generated and the predetermined notification is executed during the valid period.

According to feature B5, after the earlier predetermined notification without a valid period is executed, the intermediate effect is once executed, and then the later predetermined notification with a valid period is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the predetermined notification on the front side and the predetermined notification on the rear side.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D6, and features E1 to E5 are applied to the configurations of features B1 to B5, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature A group and the feature B group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A placement unit (a function that executes the processing of steps S1304 to S1306 in the VDP 76) that arranges object data that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a viewpoint setting unit (the VDP76) that sets a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (a function of executing the processes of step S1307 and step S1308), and a drawing that projects the object data onto a projection plane that is set based on the viewpoint and generates generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. a generation data storage means (frame buffer 82) for storing generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (VDP 76), which has
a display control means (display circuit 86) that causes the display means (symbol display device 41) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generation means includes:
Separate storage execution means (separate storage execution means (separate storage buffer 96) for storing predetermined generated data (2D data for additional screen) generated based on projecting the predetermined object data (object data 93 for additional screen) in separate storage means (separate storage buffer 96); function to execute separate storage processing in VDP76),
A mode changing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1901, S1902, and S1905 in the VDP 76) for changing the arrangement mode of the application target data (plate polygon data 95 for additional screen) arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space; ,
By applying the predetermined generated data as texture data to the application target data, the predetermined generated data is applied to a predetermined image area (additional display screen AP) corresponding to the application target data among the images displayed on the display means. A predetermined application means (a function of executing the processing of step S2002 and step S2003 in the VDP 76) for displaying the corresponding image;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, predetermined generated data generated based on projecting predetermined object data is applied as texture data to application target data that is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space and whose arrangement mode is changed as appropriate. As a result, an image corresponding to the predetermined generated data is displayed in a predetermined image area corresponding to the application target data among the images displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which another display screen is displayed on a part of the display surface of the display means, and while changing the display mode of the other display screen, the display screen can be further It becomes possible to display moving images using 3D images created in real time. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

Feature C2. The predetermined application means applies the predetermined generated data as texture data to the application target data, thereby displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined generated data in an area corresponding to a part of the display surface of the display means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein an image display is performed in which at least one display mode among display position, display angle, and size in the predetermined image area, which is the area where the image is displayed, changes.

According to feature C2, it is possible to perform an effect in which another display screen is displayed on a part of the display surface of the display means, and to further display the same while changing the display mode of the other display screen. It becomes possible to display a moving image using 3D images created in real time on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display on the display means.

Feature C3. a grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 52) that performs grant determination for determining whether to grant a privilege (occurrence of opening/closing execution mode) to a player;
a benefit granting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 52) that grants a benefit to the player based on the fact that the result of the granting determination is a granting result;
Means for display-controlling the display means so that a stopped pattern corresponding to the judgment result of the addition judgment is displayed after the variable display of the pattern is started (executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1005 in the sound-light side MPU 62) function, a function of executing the process of step S1105 in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
When the predetermined image area is displayed, the predetermined image area and a separate area (base display screen BP) on the display surface of the display means that is different from the predetermined image area are displayed during the execution of a variable display. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the pattern (base variable display image G33, additional variable display image G42) is displayed.

According to feature C3, when displaying a predetermined image area causes an effect in which another display screen is displayed on a part of the display surface of the display means, a picture that is in the middle of being displayed in a variable manner. is displayed in a separate area different from the predetermined image area and in a predetermined image area on the display surface of the display means. As a result, even if the degree of freedom in the display mode of a predetermined image area is increased, it is possible to prevent the visibility of a pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner from being impaired.

Feature C4. When the predetermined image area is displayed, the configuration is such that a situation may occur in which the type of the pattern in the predetermined image area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area. In this case, the type of the picture in the predetermined image area may become indistinguishable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area. and the pattern in the separate area, the display mode of the predetermined image area is changed so as to prevent a situation in which the type thereof becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify. gaming machines.

According to feature C4, when a predetermined image area is displayed, a situation occurs in which the type of picture in the predetermined image area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area. This is a configuration in which a situation may occur in which a change in the display mode of a predetermined image area makes it impossible or difficult to identify the type of pattern in another area. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in displaying the predetermined image area. On the other hand, the display mode of the predetermined image area is changed so as not to cause a situation in which the type of both the pattern in the predetermined image area and the pattern in another area becomes indiscernible or difficult to identify. As a result, even if the degree of freedom in the display mode of a predetermined image area is increased, it is possible to prevent the visibility of a pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner from being impaired.

Feature C5. The predetermined image area is configured to be displayed in a situation where a reach effect is being executed,
When the predetermined image area is displayed, the same combination of ready-to-reach symbols (base variation display image G33, additional variation display image G42) is displayed in each of the predetermined image area and the separate area. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4.

According to feature C5, when displaying a predetermined image area causes an effect in which another display screen is displayed on a part of the display surface of the display means, the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is The image is displayed in a separate area different from the predetermined image area on the display surface and in a predetermined image area. Thereby, even if the degree of freedom in the display mode of the predetermined image area is increased, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the combination of ready-to-reach symbols from being impaired.

Feature C6. When the predetermined image area is displayed, a situation may occur in which the type of combination of the ready-to-reach symbols in the predetermined image area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area. The configuration is such that a situation may occur in which the type of combination of the ready-to-reach symbols in the separate area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area; Changing the display mode of the predetermined image area so that a situation in which the types of both the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols in the predetermined image area and the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols in the different area become indistinguishable or difficult to identify occurs does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein:

According to feature C6, when a predetermined image area is displayed, a situation where the type of combination of ready-to-reach symbols in the predetermined image area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify due to a change in the display mode of the predetermined image area. This is a configuration in which a change in the display mode of a predetermined image area may cause a situation in which the type of combination of ready-to-reach symbols in another area becomes unidentifiable or difficult to identify. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in displaying the predetermined image area. On the other hand, the display mode of the predetermined image area is changed to prevent a situation in which the types of both the combination of ready-to-reach symbols in a predetermined image area and the combination of ready-to-reach symbols in another area become impossible or difficult to identify. be exposed. Thereby, even if the degree of freedom in the display mode of the predetermined image area is increased, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the combination of ready-to-reach symbols from being impaired.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the applicable data is plate-shaped polygon data.

According to feature C7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the data capacity required for storing object data.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D6, and features E1 to E5 are applied to the configurations of features C1 to C7, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores three or more types of predetermined image data (color map data 111, partial mask data) as image data for displaying predetermined individual images (symbols "1" to "9"). 112, shadow mask data 113, line image data 114) are stored in advance,
The display control means utilizes combined image data (image data of first to fifth display modes) created by combining a plurality of types of predetermined image data included in the predetermined types of predetermined image data. In this way, a data synthesis means (a function for executing drawing data creation processing for a special symbol effect in the VDP 76) is provided, which sets a display mode when displaying the predetermined individual image to a display mode corresponding to the post-synthesis image data;
The data synthesis means can display the predetermined individual images in a plurality of display modes by changing the combination of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to be synthesized when creating the post-synthesis image data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D1, post-synthesis image data is created by combining multiple types of predetermined image data included in three or more predetermined types of predetermined image data, and when displaying predetermined individual images, the post-synthesis image By using the data, a predetermined individual image is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the combined image data. By changing the combination of multiple types of predetermined image data to be combined when creating post-composition image data, it becomes possible to display predetermined individual images in multiple types of display modes. This makes it possible to change the display mode of a predetermined individual image by appropriately changing the combination of multiple types of predetermined image data to be combined when creating post-composition image data. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the number of types of the synthesized image data that can be created for the predetermined individual images in the data synthesis means is greater than the number of predetermined types.

According to feature D2, compared to a configuration in which the display storage means stores in advance the same number of image data as the number of types of post-synthesis image data that can be created as image data for displaying a predetermined individual image, the storage for display is It becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the means.

Feature D3. The data synthesis means is a means for executing a predetermined processing process on image data to be processed among the plurality of types of predetermined image data to be synthesized when creating the post-synthesis image data (step S2403 in the VDP 76). processing functions),
When creating the post-synthesis image data, even if the types of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to be synthesized are the same, whether or not the predetermined processing process is executed or the type of the predetermined processing process to be executed is different. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the display mode of the predetermined individual image can be made different by.

According to feature D3, the composition of the image data after composition is determined not only by the type of combination of multiple types of predetermined image data to be synthesized, but also by the presence or absence of execution of a predetermined processing process or the difference in the type of predetermined processing process to be executed. The type will change. This makes it possible to secure many types of post-composition image data, thereby making it possible to diversify the display mode of predetermined individual images.

Feature D4. The game according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the predetermined image data is two-dimensional image data, and is set as image data of the same size and shape. Machine.

According to feature D4, the predetermined image data of the predetermined type are all two-dimensional image data, and are all set as image data of the same size and shape, so multiple types of predetermined image data are combined. It becomes possible to simplify the processing when performing the synthesis, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load for performing the synthesis.

Feature D5. a grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 52) that performs grant determination for determining whether to grant a privilege (occurrence of opening/closing execution mode) to a player;
a benefit granting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 52) that grants a benefit to the player based on the fact that the result of the granting determination is a granting result;
Means for display-controlling the display means so that after the variable display of a plurality of types of symbols is started on the display section, a stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the addition determination is displayed (step S1002 in the sound-light side MPU 62) a function of executing the process of step S1005, a function of executing the process of step S1105 in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
When the ready-to-win effect is executed on the display unit, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the final stop variation display area in a situation where the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols is stopped and displayed,
The predetermined individual images are each of the plurality of types of patterns,
The display storage means stores the predetermined types of predetermined image data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of pictures,
With respect to the symbols forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols in the situation where the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the data synthesis means may combine multiple types of predetermined images included in the predetermined image data of the predetermined types corresponding to the symbols. By using the reach-compatible post-synthesis image data generated by compositing image data, the display mode can be changed from the previous normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the reach-compatible post-synthesis image data, The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the symbols other than the symbols forming the ready-to-win symbol combination continue to be displayed in a normal display mode.

According to feature D5, by using the ready-to-reach combined image data for the symbols that form a combination of reachable symbols, the previous display in the normal display mode is changed to correspond to the ready-to-reach combined image data. While the display is changed to the display mode, symbols other than the symbols forming the ready-to-reach symbol combination continue to be displayed in the normal display mode. Thereby, when a reach effect occurs, it is possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the display mode of all the symbols is changed by the combined image data. Further, since the symbols whose display mode is to be changed are symbols forming a combination of reach symbols, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the display mode has been changed.

Feature D6. The data synthesis means is capable of creating a plurality of types of post-combination image data corresponding to the reach so that the display modes of the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols are different;
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein each of the plurality of types of display modes of the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols has a different expected degree of awarding the benefit.

According to feature D6, it is possible to create a plurality of types of post-combination image data corresponding to the reach, thereby making it possible to diversify the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of the reach. In addition, each of the plurality of types of display modes has a different expectation level for awarding the benefit. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation of granting a benefit based on the display mode of the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D6, and features E1 to E5 are applied to the configurations of features D1 to D6, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
In the specific image data (object data 121 for special character or drawing data after projection) used to display specific individual images (special character images G61 to G63), between the specific individual image and surrounding images. Boundary specifying means for specifying a data area corresponding to a predetermined boundary that is at least one of the boundary between the parts and the boundary between each part in the specific individual image (a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2608 in the VDP 76, a step in the VDP 76) A function to execute the processing from S2704 to S2711);
Processing means that processes the image of the predetermined boundary by executing data processing processing based on the data area specified by the boundary specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2612 to S2619 in the VDP 76, step S2712 in the VDP 76) ~Function to execute the process of step S2718),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, a data area corresponding to a predetermined boundary is specified in the specific image data, and data processing processing is performed using the specified data area as a reference. This makes it possible to display a specific individual image with image processing applied to a predetermined boundary using specific image data, and to use the predetermined boundary as a reference while reducing the storage capacity required in the display storage means. It becomes possible to change the display mode of a specific individual image as follows. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

Feature E2. The display control means includes:
Arranging means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1304 to S1306 in the VDP 76) for arranging specific object data (object data 121 for a special character) corresponding to the specific individual image in a virtual three-dimensional space;
a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S1307 and step S1308 in the VDP 76);
A drawing setting unit that projects the specific object data onto a projection plane that is set based on the viewpoint and generates generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (a function that executes the process of step S1311 in the VDP 76) )and,
means (display circuit 86) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data on the display unit;
Equipped with
The specific image data is the specific object data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Feature E1 characterized in that the boundary specifying means executes a process for specifying a data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary on the specific object data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E2, since the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary is identified in the state of specific object data that is three-dimensional information arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary is specified in the state of generated data that is two-dimensional information. Compared to a configuration in which a data area corresponding to a boundary is specified, a data area corresponding to a predetermined boundary can be specified with high accuracy.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the processing means executes the data processing processing on the generated data using the data area specified by the boundary specifying means as a reference.

According to feature E3, even if the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary is specified in the state of specific object data that is three-dimensional information arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary Data processing based on is performed on generated data that is two-dimensional information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for data processing.

Feature E4. The boundary specifying means executes a process for specifying a data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary on the specific object data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, thereby determining the specific object data. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that information indicating whether or not each unit data constituting the data corresponds to the predetermined boundary is set.

According to feature E4, when processing for identifying a data area corresponding to a predetermined boundary is performed on specific object data arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, each unit constituting the specific object data Information indicating whether the data corresponds to a predetermined boundary is set. This makes it possible to check for each unit of data whether or not it corresponds to a predetermined boundary, thereby making it possible to accurately identify a data area that corresponds to a predetermined boundary.

Feature E5. The display control means includes:
Arranging means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1304 to S1306 in the VDP 76) for arranging specific object data (object data 121 for a special character) corresponding to the specific individual image in a virtual three-dimensional space;
a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S1307 and step S1308 in the VDP 76);
A drawing setting unit that projects the specific object data onto a projection plane that is set based on the viewpoint and generates generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (a function that executes the process of step S1311 in the VDP 76) )and,
means (display circuit 86) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data on the display unit;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the boundary specifying means executes processing for specifying a data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary on the generated data.

According to feature E5, since the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary is specified in the state of generated data that is two-dimensional information, the data area corresponding to the predetermined boundary is specified in the state of specific object data that is three-dimensional information arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space. Compared to a configuration in which a data area corresponding to a boundary is specified, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying a data area corresponding to a predetermined boundary.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B5, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D6, and features E1 to E5 are applied to the configurations of features E1 to E5, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 41... Symbol display device, 48... Operating device for 1st production, 49... Operating device for 2nd production, 52... Main side MPU, 62... Sound and light side MPU, 72... Display CPU, 74... Memory Module, 76... VDP, 82... Frame buffer, 86... Display circuit, 93... Object data for additional screen, 95... Board polygon data for additional screen, 96... Separate storage buffer, 111... Color map data, 112... Part Mask data, 113...Shadow mask data, 114...Line image data, AP...Additional display screen, BP...Base display screen, G11...First suggestion effect image, G12...Second suggestion effect image, G33...Base fluctuation display image, G42...Additional variation display image, P...Display surface, RE...Reservation area.

Claims (1)

arrangement means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space; viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space; and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. a drawing setting means for projecting and generating generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane; a generated data storage means for storing generated data generated by the data generating means;
a display control means for causing a display means to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generation means includes:
separate storage execution means for storing predetermined generated data generated based on projecting the predetermined object data in separate storage means;
A mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of the application target data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space;
By applying the predetermined generated data as texture data to the application target data, an image corresponding to the predetermined generated data is displayed in a predetermined image area corresponding to the application target data of the image displayed on the display means. predetermined application means for making the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images